JP2022105219A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.

SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, when a start lever 41 is operated, respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating after execution of betting by operation of credit loading switches 56 to 58, and lottery processing corresponding to the number of bets is performed. When the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped by operation of stop switches 42 to 44, a stop display mode corresponding to a lottery result of lottery processing can be stopped. Further, based on a lottery result, a shift lottery or the like to an attack mode may be held. Also, when a first BB and a second BB are won, and a stop display mode corresponding to the first BB and the second BB is stopped, a shift to a bonus state occurs. When the corresponding stop display mode does not stop, a carry-over results. In winning of a specific winning combination for triggering a shift lottery to an attack mode during the carry-over state, execution of the shift lottery or the like to the attack mode is limited.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts rotating, and the reel stops during rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The invention according to claim 1 is
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the design of each orbital body, and
A starting operation means in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means for starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated.
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The game state is played based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result, and the pattern combination for the first transition corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. The first specific state is shifted to a person's advantage, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result, and the pattern for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result at the effective position. A transition means for shifting the gaming state to a second specific state, which is advantageous for the player and different from the first specific state, based on the fact that the combination is stopped.
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, the symbol combination for the first transition is stopped at the effective position or the symbol combination for the second transition is stopped. Until then, the reservation means for retaining the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, an advantageous lottery for executing an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player and different from the first specific state and the second specific state is executed. Means and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is performed. The limiting means to limit and
When the reservation means reserves the first transition result winning and the limiting means restricts the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means, the first specific control is executed based on the specific result winning. Means and
When the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is restricted by the limiting means, the second specific control is different from the first specific control based on the specific result winning. 2 Second means to execute specific control and
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows the RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 3rd RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a BB state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the display mode. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition notification processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of push order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a special zone. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of betting. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pushing order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notification timing and the addition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific role. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning probability of each combination, the winning probability of the attack mode transition lottery, and a set value. It is a flowchart which shows the stop information setting process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the presence / absence of restriction. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the winning mode before and after the transition to the carry-over state. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the winning mode before and after the transition to the carry-over state. (A) is a flowchart showing a special notification process, and (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table of a push instruction lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a chance notification effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the comprehensive chance notification effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the white BAR push instruction notification effect and the black BAR push instruction notification effect. In the second embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing point processing at the time of winning, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a point table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect based on the point addition process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect based on the point addition process. It is a flowchart which shows the stop information setting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the presence / absence of restriction. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning probability of each combination, the winning probability of the attack mode transition lottery, and the set value in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning mode, the presence / absence of a restriction, the winning probability, and a set value. It is a flowchart which shows the stop information setting process. It is a figure which shows the outline of the winning mode of each combination in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a part of the symbol arrangement of the right reel. It is a flowchart which shows the stop information setting process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning mode, the presence / absence of limitation, the winning probability, and the set value in the 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning mode, the presence / absence of limitation, the winning probability, and the set value in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning mode, the presence / absence of limitation, the winning probability, and the set value in 8th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by driving a nail to a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side portion when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by the rotation of the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is in a locked state that cannot be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured to release the locked state by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by, for example, giving a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "red bell" symbol (for example, the 7th of the left reel 32L), a "white bell" symbol (for example, the 20th of the left reel 32L), and a "first replay" symbol (for example, 19 of the left reel 32L). Second), "2nd replay" symbol (eg 6th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (eg 10th on left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (eg 8th on left reel 32L) , "Cherry" symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th of the left reel 32L) and the "youth" symbol (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L). And, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that out of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels, 3 symbols can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the symbols that can be visually recognized. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of each symbol that stops at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols on the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line where bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated and a line that is not activated depending on the number of bets on medals are set, and when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the valid line. As a winning result, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, are paid out is given, and a privilege that the game state is changed is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, only the right-down line L4 is regarded as an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (a), and the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are shown in FIG. 8 (b). There are cases where the combination line is an effective line and cases where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (c). More specifically, if three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-sloping line L4 is considered to be the valid line, and if two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line is below. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are considered to be effective lines. Further, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is regarded as an effective line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-sloping line L5 are not regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game started with 1 medal bet is started. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. If it is stopped, it will be the first small winning combination. If the first small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination have different combinations of winning symbols, but in the 3-bet game, the left reel 32L "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol and the middle reel 32M "White BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "White bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, and right reel 32R "White BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "White bell" symbol, This is a winning mode in which the "red 7" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the top, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the bottom. If you do, you will win the 8th small role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol at an adjacent position (No. 12) on the upstream side, and the right reel 32R has a "red bell" symbol. The "red bell" symbol is placed at a position (No. 20) separated from the "white BAR" symbol (No. 18) by one symbol on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 8th small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right. The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th small winning combination is a role in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol of the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Specifically, the "cherry" of the left reel 32L. The 27th small winning combination is established when the symbol stops at the upper or lower row. In this case, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L is on the upper stage or stops, that is, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is on the effective line. By stopping, the 27th small winning combination will be established. If the 27th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L may stop at the upper or lower row, and the "cherry" symbol may stop at the lower right line L4. More specifically, the left reel 32L has a "cherry" symbol or a "second replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol or a "cherry" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "cherry" symbol. When the "1st replay" symbol or the "2nd replay" symbol is stopped, the 28th small winning combination is awarded. In addition, the 28th small winning combination may or may not be won by the stop symbols of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M as predetermined reels among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The 28th small winning combination is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the effective line. In this case, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R does not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R, the "black BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M stop on the effective line, and the 28th small winning combination is established. If the 29th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

To supplement the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L or the "second replay" symbol stops, regardless of the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Although the 27th small winning combination is established, the 28th small winning combination may be established instead of the 27th small winning combination depending on the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode that is the 27th small winning combination includes the winning mode that is the 28th small winning combination, the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination are clearly distinguished and the winning judgment is made. Is done.

The 29th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. That is, when the right-down line L4 is regarded as an effective line, the 29th small winning combination is established when the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped in the right-down direction. If the 29th small winning combination is successful, 5 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 30th small It will be a winning role. In addition, the 30th small winning combination may or may not be won by the stop symbols of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M as predetermined reels among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The 30th small winning combination is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the effective line. In this case, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R does not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R, the "black BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M stop on the effective line, and the 30th small winning combination is established. If the 30th small winning combination is successful, 5 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

Left reel 32L "black BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay", middle reel 32M "red bell" symbol, right reel 32R "red bell" symbol or "white" If the "bell" symbol and stops on the valid line, the 31st small winning combination will be won. If the 31st small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination is established in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out, and in the 2-bet game, 14 medals are paid out.

In the 36th small winning combination prize, for example, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L The "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line. If the 36th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol, "white" on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "youth" symbol stop on the valid line, the 37th small winning combination will be awarded. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and the "second replay" symbol are arranged at adjacent positions (No. 6) on the downstream side, and the main "white" symbol is arranged. The "1st replay" symbol is placed at the adjacent positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th) on the downstream side of the "bell" symbol (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and the adjacent positions on the upstream side (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) are "1st". A "replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged, and a "first replay" symbol is arranged at an adjacent position (11th) on the upstream side of the "white bell" symbol (No. 10). Therefore, when the 37th small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol are mainly tempered on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M. The "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol do not stop, so-called double tempai off-stop rolls. If the 37th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

Left reel 32L "black BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol, middle reel 32M "red bell" symbol, right reel 32R "first replay" symbol, If the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the valid line, the 38th small winning combination will be won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 4th "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the upper to lower tiers, and if the 38th small winning combination is established, the left The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. If the 38th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 39th small role prize. The details will be described later, but the 39th small winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 39th small winning combination is successful, nine medals will be paid out.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 40th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 40th small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 40th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small It will be a winning role. If the 41st small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

In addition, the winning mode is set between the symbols arranged in a small number (1 or 2) on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and basically the 42nd small is a role in which the stop operation is difficult to be performed aiming at winning. A role to the 44th small role is set. These are the roles set by the gaming machine to distinguish the roles when setting the overlapping roles of each small combination. The 42nd small role as the control role 1 wins when the "Youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. do. In addition, the 43rd small role as the control role 2 wins when the "youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. Is established. The 44th small role as the control role 3 wins when the "youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. do. If the 42nd small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game. On the other hand, when the 43rd small winning combination or the 44th small winning combination is won, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

There are 1st re-game prize to 8th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that can play the next game without inserting a medal is given. Further, when the second re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game If a prize or a fifth re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. The first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize are prize modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

The state transition prizes in which only the game state transition is performed include the first BB prize, the second BB prize, and the CB prize.

When the "red 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line, the first BB prize is awarded, and when the "white BAR" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line. Will be the second BB prize. When these BB prizes are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In addition, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "first replay" symbol, and the "black BAR". If the symbol and stop on the valid line, a CB prize will be awarded. If the CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from the winning, there is a stop roll in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In addition, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, and "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. , The game state shifts to the 1st RT state even when the "Red 7" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol stop on the effective line. In the following, the combination of each of the above symbols will be referred to as a transitional outcome.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

The stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges the medal to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for paying out medals (not shown), and pays out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent the storage tank 52 from storing more than a predetermined amount of medals. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as a game medium at one time is provided. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, each credit insertion switch 56 to 58 only involves the operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

An effect switch 66 operated when an effect is generated is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57. That is, the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the effect switch 66, and the second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the effect switch 66. There is.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R in the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68 for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is provided. .. The push order notification unit 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44, respectively. The push order notification unit 68 can also be replaced by a liquid crystal display or the like, an LED lamp may be provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44 so as to make the stop switches 42 to 44 emit light, or the stop switch 42 may be provided. The LED lamps may be provided adjacent to the to 44.

At the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up and blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that comprehensively manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the payout detection sensor 51a and the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the third credit. In the third credit input detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, the settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, the reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as the setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted and turned ON are connected, and the signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104. It has become.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volt. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101 even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit The input / output port 104 includes an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68, a display control device 81, a hall management device (not shown), and the like. It is connected via.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to input a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that centrally manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. Hereinafter, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power has been restored from the power failure state. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the output of the power failure signal is continued, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the input medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the start pre-processing, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, if a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-game prize is established in a one-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting medals. By the way, in this embodiment, the re-game prize is not established in the 2-bet game, but if the game is transformed so that the re-game prize is established even in the 2-bet game, two cards are automatically inserted. It is advisable to set the virtual medal of to be automatically inserted.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game prizes has been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process is performed. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the checkout switch 59 has been operated, and if the checkout switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as a specified number in the CB state, and a gaming state other than the CB state (specifically, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, BB) is set. "1" and "3" are set as the specified number in the state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "2", and the condition is that the number of bets is "1" or "3" except in the CB state. In step S205, an affirmative judgment is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "2" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the process of waiting for the start in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After processing in step S206, a bet command including information on the processing result in step S206 and information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed in step S209. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the right-down line L4 is set as the effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are set as the effective line. Further, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S211, the reel control process of step S212, the medal payout process of step S213, the RT state process of step S214, and the bonus state process of step S215 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is successful is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of gaming states, which are roughly classified into a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and each of the lottery tables has a lottery table. It is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. .. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is displayed. select. Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the processing related to the setting of the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, "setting 1" → "setting 2". → Update the setting values so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is also updated every time the set value is updated. Then, based on the fact that the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the setting process of the winning probability is terminated. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state of “setting 3”. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether or not the combination is appropriate is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The determination value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate. In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination is made in step S305 at the index value IV (IV = 35 to 51) including any one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, the corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) are set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. When a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the processing of step S307 is performed, the winning flag of each small winning combination corresponding to the index value IV which is affirmed in step S305 in step S308 is set in the winning flag storage area. The process of setting to 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 35, the first BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small winning combination winning flag, the 33rd small winning combination winning flag, and the third small winning combination flag are set in step S308. Set the 35 small winning combination winning flag. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 16, a winning flag indicating that the 30th small winning combination and the 41st small winning combination have been won in step S308 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In steps S306 to S308 in a state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the first BB, If the winning combination other than the 2nd BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 35, the first BB winning flag is not set and the 28th small winning combination winning flag is set. , The 33rd small winning combination winning flag and the 35th small winning combination winning flag are set. Further, in the state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 36, the second BB winning flag is not set and the 28th small winning combination flag, 33rd. Set the small winning combination winning flag and the 35th small winning combination winning flag.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV. By the way, when the winning / failing judgment of the winning combination is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning the normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/3, strong cherry. The probability of winning 1 or strong cherry 2 (probability of winning when IV = 13 and 14) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 15). Is about 1/183. The probability of winning a strong watermelon 1 to 3 (probability of winning when IV = 16 to 18) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 19). Is about 1/218, the probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 21). Probability) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 65500 minutes. It is 1. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, the forward push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 24-27) is about 1 / 43.7, respectively, and the middle push bell. 1. The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, the right push bell 1, and the right push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 28 to 31) is about 1 / 21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is Approximately 1 / 4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is about 1 / 3280, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 38) The probability of winning) is about 1/6550. The probability of winning the strong watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 340) is About 1/6550. The probability of winning the weak watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is about 1/13100, and the probability of winning the weak watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 42) is about 1/13. About 1/6550. The probability of winning the chance A duplication 1, the chance A duplication 2, the chance B duplication 1, and the chance B duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 43 to 46) is about 1/3280, respectively. The probability of winning the middle bell duplication 1 and the middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 47, 48) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning a single prize in the first BB and the second BB (probability of winning when IV = 49, 50) is about 1/65500, respectively. The probability of winning the CB (probability of winning when IV = 51) is about 1 / 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/96.

In the normal game state lottery table, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV = 2 to 12, 32 to 34, 52 to 55. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the winner is not won at these index values IV.

After setting the winning flag in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S312, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S311, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S312, the lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flags set in steps S306 to S308. The stop information setting process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S315, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the priority is set so that the small winning combination is given priority and the bonus winning is established when the small winning combination cannot be established. If the replay and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the replay prize is prioritized. After executing the process of step S315, the lottery process ends.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotation in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to know which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning when IV = 24 to 31, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and the right push bell 2 (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "push order bells") are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established depending on the operation order.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time. Then, the stop information is set so that the first small winning combination is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the second small winning combination and the seventh small winning combination are established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Stop information is set so that the winning combination or the 9th small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of 4 symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode. It can be stopped and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by 5 symbols or more, it is necessary for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

A case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the second small winning combination winning, the seventh small winning combination winning, or the ninth small winning combination winning.

The second small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. Further, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as a seventh small winning combination symbol and a function as a ninth small winning combination symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged so that the distance between the second small winning combination symbols (seventh small winning combination symbols and the ninth small winning combination) is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 4th "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, as shown in FIG. 20A, the 7th "red bell" The design stops at the top. As a result, there is room for the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small winning combination symbol of the medium reel 32M is the "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. The seventh small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. And the 9th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol, or the 9th small winning combination symbol may stop on the effective line, or the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol, and the 9th small winning combination symbol may be stopped. None of the 9th small winning combination symbols may stop on the effective line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 13th "1st replay" symbol to the 17th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The "white BAR" symbol, which is a symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the second small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 9th "2nd replay" symbol to the 13th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20 (b). , The 7th small role symbol "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the 7th small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 10th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the 9th small role symbol "cherry" symbol is in the middle row. Stop at. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol, and the 9th small winning combination symbol are displayed. It cannot be stopped in the middle stage. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a timing, the No. 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the No. 6 "white bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage.

When the 7th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information 2nd setting process so that the 7th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 7th small role symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "1st replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol reaches the lower stage, FIG. 20 (c). As shown in, the "white bell" symbol, which is the 7th small role symbol, stops at the bottom. As a result, the 7th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 3rd "second replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the 4th "watermelon" symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 20 (d). Stop at the bottom. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the 9th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information 2nd setting process so that the 9th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 9th small role symbol of the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "youth" symbol is placed at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 11th "1st replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, it is the 9th small role symbol. The "Youth" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the 9th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the second small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the second small winning combination winning can be established.

The second small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white BAR" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small role symbol " The "white BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol and the 9th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M did not stop in the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stopped in the middle stage. In this case, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol are arranged so that the distance between the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) shifts as shown in Fig. 11. It's a roll.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small winning combination is established and the seventh small winning combination is established. It is either the case where the winning is established, the case where the 9th small winning combination is established, or the case where the transition roll is stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between the first small winning symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between the first small winning symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small winning combination prize is established regardless of the operation timing.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the small winning combination is established or the shift roll is stopped on the valid line depending on the operation timing. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing, and if the unquestioned bell is won, the 38th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 Small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the valid line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the valid line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the winning result handling process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the winning result command is set in step S415 so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the medal payout process in step S213 will be outlined.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes are established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes is established, the re-game setting process is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state, the automatic input processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for paying medals is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the valid line. When the transition roll is stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the shift roll has not stopped on the valid line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning combination is awarded based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine if it holds. When the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. Further, when the transition to the effective line is stopped in a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the step S503 is performed. The first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. The lottery table for the first RT state differs from the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the point value PV of IV = 1 to 5, and has the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 55 is equal to the winning probability of each winning in the normal gaming state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is about 1 in 32.8, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if the winner is won when IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and when the winner is IV = 2, the first promotion replay 1 is won, and the IV. If you win when = 3, you will win the first promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win the first promotion replay 3, and if you win IV = 5, you will win. In that case, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the 1st RT state, each winning combination of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as the normal game state, while the privilege of replay is given. Changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming prize, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won in addition to the case where the push order bell described above is won. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stopped switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won, unlike the case where the push order bell is won, the first replay prize or the first replay prize is won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. The third re-game prize is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also assigned as winning combinations. However, none of the above six operation sequences is associated with the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game. Therefore, the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game will not win a prize regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, respectively, and the first promotion replay 2 is the first replay and the first replay. The 6th replay is assigned in addition to the 3 replays, the 1st promotion replay 3 is assigned the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promotion replay 4 is assigned. Although the 8th re-game is assigned in addition to the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game, the re-games to be won are the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game regardless of which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation order in which the third replay prize is established. That is, for example, if the first promotion replay is one type, the operation order corresponding to the third replay prize is also one type, and the third replay prize is intentionally established when the first promotion replay is won. This is because it can be possible to make it. It should be noted that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game prize has been established. When the third re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508 to end this process. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 1 to 10, and the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 55 is equal to the winning probability of each winning in the first RT state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 / 13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 2-5 is not won, and the probability of winning when IV = 6-8 is about 1 / 0.5, IV = 9, respectively. , The probability of winning at 10 is about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the player shifts to the second RT state, the probability of deviation is lower than that of the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the 2nd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 4th re-gaming prize that shifts to the 3rd RT state, and the 5th re-gaming Winning and is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above are won, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second 2 Even when the promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command.

FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 are won, the first re-game prize or the second re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the second promotion replay 1 is won, one of the first re-game prize, the fourth re-game prize, and the fifth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. .. When the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first re-game prize or the fourth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the 4th re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the 4th re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a random pattern, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a disparity is stopped and the fourth replay prize is established, or the red 7・ The combination of symbols that will be stopped in the middle of the red 7 and black BARs will stop, and the 4th re-game prize will be established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination processing, It is determined whether or not the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize has been established. If the 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are not established, this process is terminated as it is. When the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process is terminated.

When the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the third RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. The lottery table for the 3rd RT state differs from the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24) in the point value PV of IV = 9 to 12, and has the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 55 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9,10. At that time, it will not be won, and the probability of winning at IV = 11 and 12 will be about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, the winning mode is that the small winning combination, the re-gaming, and the bonus are won with the same probability as the 2nd RT state, while the privilege of the re-gaming is given. Changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, and the 6th re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, 7 Re-game prize, 8 re-game prize, and 3rd re-game prize that shifts to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set the stop information.

FIG. 23 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. If BAR Replay 1 is won, any of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 7th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true. If BAR Replay 2 is won, any one of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 8th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether or not any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the CB winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processes of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol or "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. If, stops on the valid line, it will be a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the distance between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets of the medal has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the valid line setting processing (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Is set as a valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, the lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 51, and "16384" is set as the point value of IV = 52 to 55. Is set (see Fig. 17 etc. for the correspondence between IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 1 (probability of winning when IV = 52) is about 1/4.0, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 2 (IV = 53). The probability of winning in the case of CB is about 1/4.0, and the probability of winning in CB small and medium-sized role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 54) is about 1 in 4.00, and CB. The probability of winning the small and medium-sized role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 55) is about 1/4.00. No outlier event occurs.

FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 to the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 4 is won, some small winning combination will be won regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. It always holds. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded if the 1st small role prize, the 27th small role prize, the 31st small role prize, the 36th small role prize to the 38th small role prize are established. If the payout is made and the 2nd small role prize-26th small role prize, the 28th small role prize-30th small role prize, the 32nd small role prize-35th small role prize are established, 14 cards will be awarded. The medal is paid out. That is, when the state shifts to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables a game (JAC game) of one game to be executed as a winning combination, and a single bonus winning (winning). ) May be provided for the transition SB state.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, when it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established.

Then, when any of the BB winnings is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. The flag is set. After that, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or higher than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processes of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. ..

FIG. 28 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state to be transferred in the first BB and the second BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 31, 35 to 55, and "21845" is set as the point value of IV = 32 to 34. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB small and medium-sized combination 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB small and medium-sized combination 2 (IV = 33). (Probability of winning at the time) is about 1 / 3.00, and probability of winning the BB small and medium-sized role 3 (probability of winning at IV = 34) is about 1 / 3.00. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/65500.

FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. As described above, the first small winning combination prize is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, regardless of which of the BB small and medium-sized winning combination 1, the BB small and medium-sized winning combination 2, and the BB small and medium-sized winning combination 3 is won, the first small and medium-sized winning combination is won regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Either the 39th small role prize or the 40th small role prize is always established. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, 9 medals are paid out when the 1st small winning combination, the 39th small winning combination, and the 40th small winning combination are established. Since the probability of loss in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB winning is established, a process of setting a carry-over command is performed in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to know that the bonus winning is not established in the bonus winning game and the so-called carry-over state has been established, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. It is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of.

Here, in the present embodiment, winning of other bonuses is restricted in the game played in the carry-over state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 17), when a duplicate combination with the bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) of IV = 35 to 51 is won, these bonuses are dealt with. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when a duplicate winning combination with each small winning combination of IV = 35 to 48 is won, the winning flag of each small winning combination is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is not set, and the small winning combination is not set. Only winning is valid. That is, the carry-over state can be said to be a state in which the bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter becomes 0, and if it becomes 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Further, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in this game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state is completed, the game state at the time when the CB winning is established is restored. For example, if the CB prize is established under the normal gaming state, the game returns to the normal gaming state after the end of the CB state, and if the CB prize is established under the third RT state, the third RT state is established after the end of the CB state. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state. By the way, in the case of shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When shifting to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (= 9 × 24-3 × 24) medals by the time the BB state ends.

When none of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), none of the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, and the CB winning is established and carried over. When a command is set (when the process of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in step S605 and step S612, and when the end determination process is performed in step S614, Goes to step S606 and sets a status command. Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game), and in step S606, the state information storage area. Set the status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The CB state is not shown.

When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the transition roll stops on the valid line, and the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third re-game prize is established when one of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (a)). .. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state are not won, so that the 1st RT state does not shift to the 3rd RT state.

In addition, when the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the 2nd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state when the 4th re-gaming prize or the 5th re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped on the valid line. The 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are established when the 2nd promotion replay 1 or the 2nd promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 23 (b). )reference). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the 3rd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the 3rd re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped on the valid line. The third replay prize is established when the BAR replay 1 or the BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (c)). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

In the slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and is roughly classified into a normal mode and a challenge mode. , Attack mode, VB mode (including addition special zone), and BB mode are managed by the main control device 101.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the mode is changed from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and the lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. If you win the lottery to shift to the attack mode, you will shift to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode, and if you win the lottery to shift to the challenge mode, you will shift to the challenge mode after the end of the BB mode. If none of the transition lottery is won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the end of the BB mode. When the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode is finished. When the mode shifts from the VB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VBB mode after the BB mode ends.

The normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay. 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "push order replay") This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. Transition to challenge mode If the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and if the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning the push order bell and at the time of winning the push order replay, it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It corresponds to almost the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, as in the normal mode. In the challenge mode, a lottery for transition to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode, but it is easy to shift to the attack mode. Transition to attack mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. The challenge mode does not shift to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order replay is won, it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, which corresponds to almost the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state. Will be done. In the challenge mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell winning and the push order replay winning. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to the VB mode. In any of the attack modes, the VB mode is set as compared with the normal mode. The transition probability of is high. Transition to VB mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode is shifted to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode is different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode has the highest probability and the first attack mode has the lowest probability, and the first attack mode and the second attack mode are set. , The third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. Therefore, the stop switch 42 is notified in the operation order notified by the player. When ~ 44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when the game state shifts to the attack mode.

Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell winning and the pushing order replay winning. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation order for establishing the first replay prize is notified in the attack mode. , In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. In that case, the operation order for establishing the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is notified. Therefore, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In the VB mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when the game state shifts to the VB mode.

Explaining the transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and then return from the attack mode to the normal mode. .. And since the lottery to shift to VB mode is performed in the attack mode, if a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and the VB mode returns to the attack mode, the player expects more medals to be owned. can.

As described above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone that is expected to shift to the attack mode.

Further, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. Then, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, it basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is won, the game shifts to the second attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is won, the game shifts to the third attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery for shifting to the 4th attack mode, you will shift to the 4th attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when shifting to the attack mode, the promotion to the first attack mode → the second attack mode → the third attack mode → the fourth attack mode and the attack mode is performed, so that the transition probability to the VB mode becomes high and the attack A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the player has a configuration in which the number of medals owned by the player is increased in each display mode of the attack mode, the VBB mode, and the BB mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of RT states and a plurality of states such as a BB state and a CB state are configured to go back and forth by winning a prize in each replay or stopping a transitional outcome. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning prize is established or the transition roll is stopped. Further, in the attack mode and the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation order in which the first small winning combination can be established is notified, so that the number of owned medals can be expected to increase.

Hereinafter, the configuration related to the display mode will be described.

The configuration related to the display mode is roughly divided into (1) processing related to the transition lottery of the display mode, (2) processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the transition lottery of the display mode, and (3) based on the winning result. There is a process for shifting the display mode, and (4) a process related to the notification effect on the sub side. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Processing for lottery results>
The process related to the shift lottery of the display mode (1) is performed in the lottery result correspondence process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

In step S701, as a result of this lottery, strong cherry 1,2, weak cherry, strong watermelon 1-3, weak watermelon, chances A, B and middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1,2, weak cherry duplication 1,2, Strong watermelon duplication 1, 2, weak watermelon duplication 1, 2, chance A duplication 1, 2, chance B duplication 1, 2, middle bell duplication 1, 2 (see, for example, FIG. 17, IV = 13-22, 35-48) , Hereinafter, these roles are collectively referred to as "specific role"). When the lottery result is a specific combination, it is determined in step S702 whether or not one of the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag is set as the bonus winning flag. If neither bonus winning flag is set, that is, if it is not a specific winning combination that is a duplicate winning with the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or if it is a specific winning combination that is not a duplicate winning in a situation where it is not in a carry-over state. Is a process for shifting the display mode based on the specific combination of steps S703 to S709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination is not won, or if the bonus winning flag is set in step S702, processing for shifting to the display mode is performed in steps S710 to S713.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination is won and the bonus winning flag is not set in step S702, the current gaming state is changed in step S703. It is determined whether or not it is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S704, the first specific combination process is executed in step S705.

<First specific combination processing>
The first specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the game is in the normal game state or the first RT state, and the attack mode is not won. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the attack mode is performed. Further, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the challenge mode. When not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a chance mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as an attack mode lottery table in step S803. In the normal time table and the chance mode table, the transition probabilities to the attack mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among the strong cherries 1 and 2, the strong cherries 1 and 2 are set to have a higher probability of shifting to the attack mode than the weak cherries. In addition, the probability of transition to the attack mode is different between the normal time table and the chance mode table as a whole, and the chance mode table has a higher transition probability to the attack mode than the normal time table. Is set to.

After acquiring the table for the attack mode transition lottery in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In such a process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for shifting to the attack mode.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won based on the processing result of step S804. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the process of setting the attack mode winning flag is performed in step S806.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. Step S807 is a process for determining whether or not the bonus and the attack mode are simultaneously won. In the present embodiment, it is set so that the bonus and the attack mode are not won at the same time. Therefore, in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, the affirmative determination is made in step S702 of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31). Therefore, the first specific combination process is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, step S807 is always determined to be negative. In the case of a configuration in which simultaneous winning of the bonus and the attack mode can occur, it is preferable that the processing corresponding to the processing after step S808 is performed after the bonus is completed. In the first specific combination process to the third specific combination process, other processes for determining the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag regarding whether or not the bonus and the display mode transition lottery are simultaneously won (step S815, step S819, The same applies to step S906, step S916, and step S1003).

If a negative determination is made in step S807, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, when the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the VB mode is won as the transition lottery of the display mode, the notification that the transition lottery has been won is notified after passing through the precursor mode. Will be done. Therefore, the game that won the transition lottery may differ from the game that is notified that the transition lottery has been won. , Set as precursor mode.

As the number of precursor games, 1 game to 32 games are set, and in step S808, one of these 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. It should be noted that the number of precursor games to be selected may be set to be different depending on the specific combination that triggered the winning of the attack mode and the game state. This also applies to the lottery process for the number of other precursor games.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The precursor counter is a counter that is subtracted by 1 for each game, and when the precursor counter becomes 0, it is notified that the precursor mode has ended and the transition lottery has been won.

In step S810, a process of setting a precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is executed. The precursory command includes information on the lottery result (display mode that shifts after the precursory mode, attack mode in the case of step S810) and the number of precursory games that triggered the precursory mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S810, the first specific combination process is terminated.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first specific combination processing is terminated as it is without setting the number of precursor games. When the bonus winning flag is set, as already explained, the transition lottery is won in the configuration where the transition lottery in the attack mode can be won by the overlapping role with the bonus (strong cherry duplication 1, 2, etc.). This is the case. In this case, the BB mode has priority over the attack mode as the transition destination of the display mode.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, the challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, the table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the transition probability to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among the strong cherries 1 and 2, the strong cherries 1 and 2 are set to have a higher probability of transition to the challenge mode than the weak cherries.

The case where step S811 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case as well, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S811, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. It is a table of. As in steps S801 to 803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, the process of setting the challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is executed in step S814.

In the following step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is not set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S816, the process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S817, and the process for setting the precursor command is executed in step S818. After that, the first specific combination processing is terminated. The processes of steps S815 to S818 correspond to steps S807 to S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, the process for adding the continuous game in the challenge mode is performed in steps S819 to S823. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S820, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. In step S820, a value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the strong cherries 1 and 2, there is an 80% chance of adding 30 games in the challenge mode, and a 20% chance of adding 50 games. For weak cherries, there is an 80% chance of adding 5 games, and a 20% chance of adding 20 games.

In step S821, the number of games in the challenge mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S820 is added to the counter (more specifically, the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S822, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The addition command includes information that the addition has occurred, the number of additional games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) to be added. The processing on the display control device 81 side that received the addition command will be described in detail later, but the display control device 81 adds the information included in these addition commands as notification based on the reception of the addition command. Notify (additional production).

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process proceeds to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination processing is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends when the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. In the present embodiment, the first specific combination process is not executed in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set. Therefore, basically, the negative determination in step S9819 is as described above. That is, step S823 is used in a configuration in which the bonus and the challenge mode lottery can be won in duplicate.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S703 or an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. In the second RT state, in step S707, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when the transition to the VB mode is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S707, the second specific combination process is executed in step S708. If a negative determination is made in step S706 or an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the third specific combination process is executed in step S709.

<Second specific combination processing>
The second specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the second RT state is set and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second specific combination processing, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode is performed. Further, in the second specific combination processing, the rank promotion lottery of the attack mode is performed, and the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, a process of grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, step S901 determines which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode is the rank of the current attack mode.

In step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probabilities to the VB mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among the strong cherries 1 and 2, the strong cherries 1 and 2 are set to have a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the weak cherries. Further, in the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is different as a whole, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. As described above, the 4th attack mode has a higher probability of shifting to the VB mode than the 3rd attack mode so that the 3rd attack mode has a higher probability of shifting to the VB mode than the 2nd attack mode. It is set so that the transition probability of is high.

In step S903, the VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting the VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S909, the process for setting the number of precursor games is performed in the same manner as in steps S807 to S810. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is not set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S907, the process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S908, and the process for setting the precursor command is executed in step S909. After that, the second specific combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, the attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In such a process, a table for promotion lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105, and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode, specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode. There are three (promotion lottery is not performed when staying in the 4th attack mode). In each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among the strong cherries 1 and 2, the strong cherries 1 and 2 are set to have a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherries. Further, in each attack mode table, the promotion probability of the second attack mode table is lower than that of the first attack mode table, so that the third attack mode table has a lower promotion probability than the second attack mode table. The table for attack mode is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank as the rank of attack mode is promoted.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion winning. If the promotion is won, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In such a process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the rank of the current attack mode to the rank flag one higher than the rank flag. After that, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command contains information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As an effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set according to the rank of the attack mode, and the display control device 81 receives the promotion command in the attack mode. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that the effect for the attack mode is performed with the background color according to the rank of the promotion destination.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S913 is executed, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, the attack mode additional lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of the specific combination. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% chance of winning an additional lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% chance of winning an additional lottery. The winning probability may be different depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has not been won, the second specific combination processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the attack mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the number of additional games in the attack mode is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, with strong cherries 1 and 2, there is a 90% chance that 20 games will be added in the attack mode, and a 10% chance that 80 games will be added. For weak cherries, there is a 95% chance of adding 5 games, and a 5% chance of adding 100 games.

In step S918, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S917 is added to a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S919, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is terminated.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends when the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. In the present embodiment, the process of step S920 is not performed (the affirmative determination is not made in step S916) as described above.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is a case where the third RT state is set, or a state where the second RT state is set and the VB mode is won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. The winning probability of the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process of step S914 and the lottery process of step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in the attack mode is added, and in step S1006, the added command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The processing of steps S1003 to S1006 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S919. The number of additional games may be different between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above. Further, in the present embodiment, the process of step S1007 is not performed (the affirmative determination is not made in step S1003) as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the lottery process is not a specific combination winning, or even if the specific combination is won, the bonus winning flag is set in step S702. If it is determined that the set has been set, in step S710, whether or not the result of the lottery process this time is a push order replay or a push order bell (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as a "push order role"). Is determined. If the push order combination is won, the push order combination process is executed in step S711. The push order combination processing will be described in detail later.

After executing any of the processes of step S705, step S708, step S709 and step S711, or after making a negative determination in step S710, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The special zone flag is a flag set based on the establishment of the 7th re-game prize, and the additional special zone is a high addition of the number of continuous games in the attack zone over multiple games. Shows the state that occurs with probability. If the special zone flag is set in step S712, the special zone process is executed in step S713. The special zone flag, the special zone, and the special zone processing will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S712, or after the process of step S713 is executed, the process for dealing with the lottery result is terminated.

As described above, when it is determined that a specific winning combination has been won in the lottery result handling process, a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, or a challenge, provided that the bonus winning flag is not set. Processing for adding the number of continuous games in the mode or attack mode is performed. If the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won, the notification of winning the transition lottery is given after the precursory game. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Process for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery>
(2) In the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the gaming state are performed. And the processing to do is done. Therefore, first, the process related to the notification that the transition lottery has been won will be described.

<Process for mode transition notification>
The notification that the transition lottery has been won is performed in the mode transition notification processing (step S206) in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a predetermined number). Hereinafter, the mode transition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. The number of precursor games is counted in the winning result correspondence process described later, and the number of precursor games is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

When the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. Then, in step S1104, the challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, the challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies that the challenge mode is started by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S1106, counting of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1106, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state when the attack mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1110, the attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies that the attack mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1110, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state when the VB mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1114, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies that the VB mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1114, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated. If it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

That is, of the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode that shifts through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. On the other hand, in the attack mode and VB mode, only the notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is performed based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0, which is a precursor. Even if the number of games becomes 0, the attack mode and VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode does not involve the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode accompany the transition of the gaming state, and specifically, the attack mode shifts to the second RT state. It is started and the VB mode is due to the difference that it is started by shifting to the 3rd RT state.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is the case where the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, the 3rd replay winning is established, and the 3rd RT state is the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2. The transition is made when the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay prize is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay prizes are established, This is the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay winning or the like. Therefore, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the winning combination is to shift the gaming state thereafter. It is configured to enable the transition of the game state. It should be noted that from the notification that the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery has been won to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state shifts), the notification as a preparation state (for example, "" "Preparing" will be announced.

<Explanation about transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the push order combination process (step S710) in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the push order combination processing, an outline of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

<Overview of push order notification effect>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (push order notification effect) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the push order notification unit 68. Here, a case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and it is displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a numerical value is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

In the push order notification unit 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, 68c provided side by side corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the middle LED lamp 68b is lit, and the left and right LED 68a, 68c lamps are lit. Turns off. As a result, the player can recognize that the stop switch to be operated first in this game is the middle stop switch 43. The push order notification unit 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination together with the push order by changing the color of the LED lamp to be turned on. Further, the lighting color of the LED lamp corresponding to the second and subsequent operations may be changed or blinked so that the stop switch to be operated after the second can be recognized.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 36B, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

In the push order notification unit 68, the LED lamp 68b in the middle is turned off and the LED lamp 68c on the right is turned on (the LED lamp 68a on the left remains turned off). As a result, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 36C, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

In the push order notification unit 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains off). As a result, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification effect, the push order is during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. The notification effect is set to be executed. In this way, by configuring the push order notification effect to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the stop switches 42 to 42 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation of 44 desired, and the game can be advanced at a good tempo.

<Pushing order processing>
Next, the push order combination process executed in step S710 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is the case where the first re-game or the third re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

If the attack notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the third re-game is executed in step S1203. Specifically, among the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (a)). After that, in step S1204, a process of setting the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order combination process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the push order notification command will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the case of notifying the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning in step S1203, basically, the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed via the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after the damage and before the transition to the attack mode. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even after the transition to the attack mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state, and even in such a case, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. By doing so, it is possible to return to the second RT state at an early stage.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the fall replays 1 to 3. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is the case where the first re-game or the second re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the first re-game is executed in step S1207. Specifically, among the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1208, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, and the game state is changed. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first re-game prize is established and the third re-game prize is established. , There is.

In addition, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in the situation where the attack notification flag is set, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified, and the game state is shifted to the first RT state. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. Will shift from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state.

Further, for example, in the 1st RT state, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay winning, and the 3rd replay winning is established. Even if it is done (even if it shifts to the 2nd RT state), the 2nd replay winning can be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to shift to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, it will promptly shift to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1209 is the case where the first re-game, the fourth re-game, or the fifth re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the VB notification flag is a flag set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the VB mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

When the VB notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed in step S1212. Specifically, among the first re-game, the fourth re-game, and the fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game prize or the fifth re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1213, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, the process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1208. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and the player must be in the attack mode. If there is no push order notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1214 is a case where any one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game wins, depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, the process for notifying the push order of the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game is executed. Specifically, among the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the sixth re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize is notified (FIG. 23 (FIG. 23). c) See). After that, in step S1218, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1208. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the BAR replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and the push order is performed if the attack mode is not in progress. No forward notification effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the lottery result this time is a push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, in step S1220, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the normal mode or the challenge mode. When the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed in step S1221 (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1222, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the main push order combination processing is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process.

<Process to shift the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, a process will be described when a winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is awarded as a result of the notification for shifting the gaming state as described above (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S411) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In step S1301, the game number management process is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode described above, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted.

In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established based on the stop result this time. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, the RT state process (FIG. 21) performs a process for shifting the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as the flag for specifying the display mode, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a special zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode (VB mode, additional special zone), the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, VB mode flag, It has a structure that coexists with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, the case where it is determined in step S1304 that the attack mode flag is set includes the case where the attack mode is in progress, the case where the VB mode is in effect, and the case where the special zone is in progress. ..

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, since the display mode is already the attack mode, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the attack mode flag is not set, the process for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, the attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, the attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command notifies that the attack mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1307, counting of the number of continuous attack modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the attack mode is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1307 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third replay winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, as a result of this stop, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established. As described above, when the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are established, the RT state process (FIG. 21) performs a process for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the VB mode flag is set. When the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the VB mode flag is not set, the process for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, the process of setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is a mode in which the VB mode shifts through the attack mode, and after the VB mode ends, the VB mode always shifts to the attack mode.

After that, in step S1312, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies that the VB mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1313, counting of the number of continuous VB modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1313 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the 4th and 5th replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1314. In step S1314, as a result of this stop, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established. In the present embodiment, when the 7th replay prize is established, that is, the "black BAR" symbol is in the middle of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol is in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol is in the middle of the right reel 32R. When the "black BAR" symbol stops and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the combination line in the middle row, it is configured to shift to the additional special zone. In the additional special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added not only to the specific role but also to all the possible winning roles (pushing order role, specific role and bonus). The case where the 7th re-game prize is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game prize (FIG. 23). (C)) Further, it is a case where the 7th re-game of the 1st, 6th, and 7th re-games wins a prize, for example, 20 minutes when the BAR replay 1 is won. Win a lottery to win the 7th re-game with a probability of 1.

When the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, in step S1316, a process of setting the special zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The special zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is the above-mentioned additional special zone, and when the special zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is stopped. .. In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is because the special zone shifts to the VB mode, and after the special zone ends, it always shifts to the VB mode.

After that, in step S1317, the special zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command notifies that the special zone is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1318, the counting of the number of continuous special zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1318 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

As described above, based on the winning of the winning combination (third to fifth replay) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the process for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (FIG. 21). conduct. This is to prevent the attack mode etc. from being started based on the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the game state by chance even though the lottery for transitioning the display mode has not been won. Is.

In addition, when shifting to the display mode, among those that accompany the transition to the gaming state, when shifting to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or when shifting from attack mode to VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding winning combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of the transition to the lower mode, the transition to the display mode is not performed when the gaming state shifts due to, for example, the second re-game winning as a fall replay or the stop of the transition roll. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Game number management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes is 0. Based on the above, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As described above, in the present embodiment, each game can be played with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a 3-bet, the game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, in the 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode are not counted.

If the game ending this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is set. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1402, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and special zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the game number management process is terminated. do. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the like are cleared, but the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after the preparation state such as the attack mode is performed, the push order notification for shifting the game state is performed by these flags, and it is possible to return to the game state before the bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. If it is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (when the precursor mode is not set), or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. ..

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. In the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1407 and the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, so that the number of challenge mode continuation games is subtracted. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and the challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. In the display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the challenge mode ends in this game. After performing the process of step S1410, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. In the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1412 and the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, so that the number of attack mode continuation games is decremented. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. After that, in step S1416, the attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the attack mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1416, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. In the case of the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1418, and it is determined whether or not the zone is an additional special zone. If it is not an additional special zone, the number of VB mode continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1419. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. After that, in step S1423, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the VB mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1423, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1424. In step S1424, the number of special zone continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and the special zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1427. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in this game. As such notification, for example, the number of games that have been successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1427, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

<End judgment processing>
Next, as the process at the end of the bonus, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. As described above, the end determination process is the process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the end determination process, the success or failure of the bonus end condition is determined, and when the bonus is terminated, processing for winning notification such as an attack mode in which the bonus and the duplicate winning are performed is performed, and an attack mode in which the bonus and the overlapping winning are performed are performed. Processing for adding the number of games such as.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination is established. As already explained, the first small winning combination (BB small and medium-sized winning combination 1) is established with high probability during the bonus (FIG. 28). Further, when the BB small and medium-sized combination 2 (IV = 33) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 39th small combination winning (FIG. 27 (b)), and further, the first If the 39th small winning combination of the small winning combination and the 39th small winning combination wins the lottery, the 39th small winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, when the BB small and medium-sized winning combination 2 is won, the 39th small winning combination is won by a lottery with a probability of 1/100. If the BB small and medium-sized combination 3 (IV = 34) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 40th small-to-medium-sized combination winning (FIG. 27 (b)), and further, the first small-to-medium-sized combination. And, when the 40th small winning combination of the 40th small winning combination wins the lottery, the 40th small winning combination winning is established. In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of winning the BAR matching combination in BB, the 40th small combination wins the lottery with a probability of 1/200.

When it is determined in step S1501 that the small winning combination is established, in step S1502, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts is performed. When a negative determination is made in step S1501 or after the process of step S1502 is executed, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the number of remaining payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after setting the bonus end command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1504, in steps S1505 to S1518, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding the number of continuous games.

That is, in step S1505, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. When the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1506, the number of precursor games is set in step S1507, and the precursor command is set in step S1508. The processing of steps S1506 to S1508 is the same as the processing of steps S808 to S810. After executing the process of step S1508, the end determination process is terminated.

That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the attack mode is won, after the bonus ends, the attack mode winning notification is performed via the precursor game. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will shift to an advantageous state again.

Here, if the bonus is won during any of the precursor modes before the winning notification, the precursor games are already set when the lottery process for the precursor games is performed in step S1506. In the present embodiment, even in such a case, the number of precursor games is reset. That is, regardless of the number of remaining games, the number of precursor games at the time of winning the bonus is set again after the bonus ends. By doing this, it is possible to make the feeling of excitement after the bonus ends for a long time.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. When the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the winning notification of the challenge mode and the VB mode is performed through the precursor game.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. When the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1512, the attack mode game number addition process is performed in step S1513, and the addition command is set in step S1514. .. The processing of steps S1512 to S1514 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1514, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1511, it is determined in step S1515 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. When the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1516, the challenge mode game number addition process is performed in step S1517, and the addition command is set in step S1518. .. The processing of steps S1516 to S1518 is the same as the processing of steps S820 to S822. When a negative determination is made in step S1515, or after the process of step S1518 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zones>
Next, the processing for the special zone will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The special zone processing is the processing executed in step S712 in the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 31). As already explained, the special zone shifts to the VB mode, and during the special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added to each game.

That is, in the special zone processing, first, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped in step S1601. In the following step S1602, the attack mode additional game number lottery process is performed. In the following step S1603, the number of games in the attack mode is added. Then, in step S1604, after setting the addition command, the processing for the special zone is terminated. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of additional games selected in the additional game number lottery process in step S1602 is larger than that in the additional game number lottery process in step S917.

<Processing related to notification effect on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side, various notification processes performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As various notification processes, an effect setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1702, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a mode transition notification process (FIG. 6) in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process. There are a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, and the like in 35). In the case of these bet-time commands, the bet-time effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the process of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to first commands are used. There are precursor commands and addition commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order combination processing (FIG. 37), and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

When a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the process of step S1706 is executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is a command output from step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). It is a stop command command set by. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, step S1708 executes each stop operation effect setting process.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the process of step S1708 is executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to the commands, the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, and specialization set in the winning result correspondence process (Fig. 38). There is a zone end command, etc. In the case of these commands at the time of total stop, the effect setting process at the time of total stop is executed in step S1710.

If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1711, the setting of the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than the bet time, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) and the connection without going through the main control device 101. Set the effect based on the signal from the sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), set for error notification, and so on.

Hereinafter, the bet time effect setting process, the start time effect setting process, each stop operation time effect setting process, and the all stop time effect setting process will be described. In addition, in the description of each effect setting process, it will be described with reference to the schematic views of the display effects of FIGS. 54 to 59.

<Bet production setting process>
The bet-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included as the bet command received this time. When the challenge mode start command is included, the process of setting the challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1802. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the character "Challenge mode start" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display mode to be shifted is easy to win the attack mode transition lottery. A display suggesting that the mode is a chance mode (for example, a predetermined character display) is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "grab the attack mode!" With a thick male voice) is emitted.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the attack mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1804. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “attack mode confirmed”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack number one!" In a high voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the character display of "VICTORYBONUS confirmed" is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" In the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

After executing any of the processes of step S1802, step S1804, and step S1806, or when a negative determination is made in step S1805, the other bet time effect is set in step S1807, and then the present effect setting process is performed. To finish. In the process of step S1807, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 of the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode that shifts to one condition that the game has not been performed for a predetermined time, or turning on the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Starting staging setting process>
Next, the start-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, the display mode setting process is performed. In such processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is a normal mode, a challenge mode, an attack mode, a VB mode, or a specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is used. , The display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag are set as the flags for grasping the display mode also in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side. An area is provided, the corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, the challenge mode flag is set in the setting process of the challenge mode start effect in step S1802. In step S1901, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effects are performed.

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is a push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, the push order notification process is performed in step S1903. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the push order notification command is included as the start command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the main push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is the first promotion replays 1 to 4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2003, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the third replay winning is established, and then the push order notification process is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is the fall replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the first replay winning is established, and then the push order notification process is terminated. do.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not the fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notification flag indicating that the VB winning notification has been performed is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The notified flag is cleared based on the transition to the VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it is preferable to configure the configuration to determine the presence / absence of the notified flag. If the winning notification of the VB mode has been completed, in step S2008, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the 4th and 5th replay winnings are established, and then the push order notification is performed. End the processing. If the winning notification in the VB mode has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replays 1 and 2. In the case of BAR replays 1 and 2, in step S2010, the mode correspondence flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. When in the VB mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the 6th to 8th re-game winnings are established in step S2011, and then the push order notification process is terminated. do. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the lottery result this time is a bell. If the bell is won, in step S2013, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the push order in which the bell winning is established as the first small winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the push order notification process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 44), if it is determined in step S1902 that the push order combination is not won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the specific combination is won. If the specific combination is won, the specific combination notification process is performed in step S1905. The specific combination notification process will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the process of step S1903 or step S1905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not an additional command is received as the command at the start of this time. When the addition command is received, in step S1907, a process of setting the addition effect in advance is performed so that the addition effect of the number of games corresponding to the addition command is executed at the time of stop. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games as “+10”. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64.

The details of the setting process of the addition effect of step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed based on the additional command received this time. In the following step S2102, the notification timing lottery process is executed. The notification timing lottery process is a process of drawing a lottery at which timing in the game the additional effect is performed, on the premise that the additional effect is performed in this game.

The additional effect is set so that the execution timing differs depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 47, as the execution timing of the additional effect in this game, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are set in the order of the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing at which the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, and the timing at which the stop OFF operation is performed. Is set.

Here, the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be supplementarily described. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from the initial position arranged on the front side to the operation position arranged on the back side. In the situation where it is arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in the LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are generated. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the stop ON operation is performed, which is assumed to be the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, based on the fact that the detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward the initial position by a spring or the like. Therefore, if the operation force (pushing pressure) pushed toward the operation position is not applied by releasing the hand from the stop switches 42 to 44, the stop switches 42 to 44 will be in the initial position due to the urging force of the spring or the like. Return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the stop OFF operation is performed assuming that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed based on the fact that the detection signal is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

The addition effect is set so that the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 can occur at either the stop ON operation or the stop OFF operation. That is, in a game in which the additional effect is generated, the additional effect can be generated not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed but also at the timing when the pressing operation is completed.

In the execution timing table of the additional effect, as the number of games with a relatively small number of additional games, for example, when 5 to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 50%. , The timing when the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed is 5%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 5%, and the stop ON operation of the third reel is 10%. The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 10%, and each is selected. In this case, it is easier to select when the stop ON operation of each reel is performed than when the stop OFF operation is performed.

On the other hand, as the number of games with a relatively large number of additional games, for example, when 100 or more games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed. Was performed at 20%, the stop ON operation of the second reel was 10%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel was 35%, the stop ON operation of the third reel was 10%, and the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( (When all reels are stopped) is 20%, and each is selected. In this case, it is easier to select when the stop OFF operation of each reel is performed than when the stop ON operation is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the additional effect of a large number of games is more likely to occur when the additional effect is generated during the stop OFF operation than when the additional effect is generated when the stop ON operation of each reel is performed. It is set. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, it is easy to select the number of games with the largest number of games when the second reel is stopped (ON operation, OFF operation), and the game with the second largest number of games when the third reel is stopped is selected. It is easy to set so that the smallest number of games can be easily selected when the first reel is stopped.

In this way, since the number of additional games to be notified differs depending on the stop order, the expectation for the additional effect can be different for each stop operation. For example, it can be expected that the effect will occur at the time of the stop operation in which a large number of additional effects are likely to occur. Specifically, the stop operation of the second reel, particularly the stop OFF operation of the second reel, can be expected. Sometimes you can expect it. In this case, for example, the player who expects the additional effect at the time of the stop / OFF operation of the second reel wishes to calm the mind once and generate the additional effect before the stop / OFF operation of the second reel. At the same time, it is considered that the stop / OFF operation of the second reel is performed.

That is, if there is a possibility that a notification that is advantageous to the player may occur when a predetermined operation is performed, the player temporarily interrupts the game before the predetermined operation due to the expectation for the notification. However, there are cases where the predetermined operation is performed after making time for saving and enjoying the saving time to the fullest. By doing so, it is possible to fully enjoy the notification rather than performing the advantageous notification without mental preparation. In that respect, as described above, by increasing the expectation during the stop-off operation of the second reel, a saving time is created before the stop-off operation of the second reel, that is, during the stop-on-on operation of the second reel. It will be easier. In this way, in relation to the notification timing of the obtained privilege, it becomes easy to make a saving time in the middle of the stop operation.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process of the addition effect, after the notification timing lottery process is performed in step S2102, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the lottery result of step S2102 is when the stop of any reel is ON. judge. When the stop is ON, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set in step S2104, and the additional effect is set to be generated when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the additional effect generation timing. Further, in step S2104, a process of reading the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the effect data storage area 182b and temporarily storing the data in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional effect is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads out the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the additional effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. When the stop OFF operation of these reels is performed, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set in step S2106, and the additional effect is set to be generated when the stop OFF operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the additional effect generation timing. Further, also in step S2106, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the addition effect this time is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the stop OFF operation of the third reel is performed) in step S2107. Specifically, a process of setting a flag at the time of a third reel stop OFF operation is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a. Further, also in step S2107, temporary storage processing of the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After the processing of step S2104, step S2106, or step S2107 is executed, the setting processing of the addition effect is completed.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time effect setting process, if the addition command is not received in step S1906, or after the process of step S1907 is executed, the bonus notification process is executed in step S1908, and the bonus notification process is executed in step S1909. The continuous effect setting process is executed, and then, in step S1910, other start-time effects are set, and then the start-time effect setting process ends. The bonus notification process and the continuous effect setting process will be described in detail later. In the process of step S1910, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or a process of turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation is accepted is performed.

<Production setting process for each stop operation>
Next, each stop operation effect setting process performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated when the reel is stopped ON is set as the effect of this game. If it is not set, this setting process ends as it is. If it is set, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop ON operation. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop ON operation of the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the stop ON operation effect is performed in step S2204, and then the present setting process is terminated.

For example, when the additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop ON operation this time, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). An additional effect will occur at. Further, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

Further, for example, when the current game is a push order winning combination and the push order notification effect is set, the push order notification effect is the next operation target by stopping the corresponding reel based on each stop ON operation. It changes to the production showing the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the display is made so that the first reel shown in FIG. 36A is the operation target. .. Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the reel to be operated next (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 36B is shown. It changes to a production. Further, if the two reels are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the display indicating that the second reel shown in FIG. 36B is the stop target is displayed, and the second reel is displayed by the stop ON operation. Based on the fact that the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display (FIG. 36 (c)) in which the third reel is the stop target.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2205, and it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed among the stop operations of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated when the reel stop OFF operation is set is set as the effect of this game. If it is not set, this setting process ends as it is. If it is set, in step S2207, it is determined whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop OFF operation. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, it is determined in step S2208 whether or not the special notification is set. The special notification will be described in detail later, but the special notification is set as an effect different from the normal OFF effect in relation to the stop result based on the immediately preceding stop ON operation. If the special notification is not set, in step S2209, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the normal stop OFF operation effect is performed, and then the present setting process is terminated.

For example, when the additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation this time, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are used. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the present effect setting process is terminated as it is. Further, the process when the affirmative determination is made in step S2208 will be described in detail later.

<Production setting process when all are stopped>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of total stop will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. When the challenge mode end command is included, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed in step S2302. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the character display of "challenge mode end" is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, the sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Make more devotion!" With a male's thick voice) is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the attack mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode start command is included, the process of setting the attack mode start effect is performed in step S2304. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “attack mode !! Ver.1”. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack mode start!" With a high voice of a woman).

By the way, the display of "Ver.1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, it is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "attack mode !! Ver.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the promotion effect. In addition, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.3" are displayed, and when the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.4" are displayed. The display is done.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the attack mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode end command is included, the process of setting the attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the character "attack mode END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the current attack mode (VB mode, special zone is included). ) Is displayed, and the total number of payouts in this attack mode (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you" in the high voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode start command is included, the process of setting the VB mode start effect is performed in step S2308. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the character "777 VICTORY !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" by the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the VB mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode end command is included, the process of setting the VB mode end effect is performed in step S2312. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the character "VICTORY BONUS END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total number of payouts in the attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of this VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "it will continue" in the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the special zone start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone start command is included, the process of setting the special zone start effect is performed in step S2314. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "Additional challenge !!" and a special mode in which the attack mode is likely to be added. The character suggesting that is is displayed. In addition, in the special zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "go" by the voice of a boy) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the special zone end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone end command is included, the process of setting the special zone end effect is performed in step S2316. In the special zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64. It is advisable to make the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 different according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not the bonus end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the bonus end command is included, the process of setting the bonus end effect is performed in step S2318. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during this bonus, and if the bonus has moved to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode (attack mode). Display the total number of payouts (including VB mode, special zone, bonus). In addition, in the bonus end production, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the success or failure of the attack mode, the success or failure of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of the processes of step S2302, step S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2312, step S2314, step S2316 and step S2318, or after making a negative determination in step S2315, the process goes to step S2309 and step S2319. move on. In step S2309 and step S2319, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As described above, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1907 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, when the generation timing of the additional effect this time is set at the time of full stop in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 46), all the reels 32L and 32M are as shown in FIG. 49 (c). , 32R is stopped, and an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

After that, in step S2310 and step S2320, other stop-time effects are set, and then the present effect setting process ends. In steps S2310 and S2320, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to be lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64. , The sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of these display modes, various in-game staging processes are performed.

<Processing for directing during various games>
In the present embodiment, as the effects during various games, a continuous effect and a bonus effect are provided. The continuous production is a production that expects a favorable result for the player (winning a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.), and is a game of multiple times (4 times in this embodiment). It is a production that can be continued over a period of time, and is a production in which notification of whether or not the advantageous result was achieved in the final game is performed. The bonus medium effect is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB and the second BB prizes.

The outline of the continuous production will be described with reference to FIG. 59.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set (in the figure, four stages corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). Shows a daruma-dropping effect). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the first stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully dropped. It shows that the continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect ends in the middle (for example, an effect in which the first stage daruma drop fails). ). The effect regarding the presence or absence of continuation of the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of the Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the second stage daruma doll has been successfully removed, and the continuous effect is continued. Is shown).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two-stage Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the third stage daruma drop is successful, and the continuous effect is continued. Is shown).

As shown in FIG. 59 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous production, a display suggesting that it is the final game of the continuous production is performed (in the figure, the one-stage Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect of whether or not the result is advantageous for the player is performed (the figure shows an effect that the final stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully removed).

As described above, in the continuous production, the production of the next game is set by taking over the production of the previous game, and the production of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous production (how many games are there until the end of the continuous production).

Here, in each game of continuous production, whether or not the continuous production is continued until the next game is set so that the continuation rate becomes higher as the game of continuous production progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, the possibility of being notified of the discontinuation of the continuous effect is the highest, and as the game progresses, the possibility of being notified of the discontinuation is low. Therefore, in the continuous production, the level of interest of the player differs greatly depending on the number of games in the continuous production of the current game, and the higher the interest is drawn as the game progresses from the start game to the end game. ..

The setting of the continuous effect is performed in the specific combination notification process (step S1905), the bonus notification process (step S1908), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1909) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 44). Therefore, each process will be described below in order.

<Process for bonus notification>
First, the bonus notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a bonus winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. In the case of a bonus winning game, in step S2402, a notification game lottery process for notifying the bonus winning is executed. In the notification game lottery process, the number of games after which the bonus winning is notified is determined by lottery. Specifically, 1 notification game is determined from 0 games (notified in this game) to 10 games. In the lottery of the notification game, the notification game may be different depending on the winning combination (whether or not the winning combination is duplicated, and if the notification game is duplicated, the type of the duplicated small combination, etc.). For example, if the bonus is won by duplication of strong cherries 1 and 2, a small number of games may be easily selected, and if the bonus is won by duplication of weak cherries, a large number of games may be easily selected. ..

In the following step S2403, a process of setting the number of continuous production games is performed based on the notification game determined by the process of step S2402. Specifically, in step S2403, the continuous effect game is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is notified, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which continuous production of four games is performed, continuous production is started in a game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and result notification is performed in a game in which the continuous production counter is 0. More specifically, for example, when it is decided in step S2402 to notify the bonus winning after 10 games, 10 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous effect starts from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4. If it is decided in step S2402 to notify the bonus winning after 5 games, 5 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. Even in this case, the continuous effect starts from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4.

If less than 4 notification games are set in step S2402, the continuous production is started from the middle. For example, if it is decided in step S2402 that the bonus winning is notified after two games, 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous production starts from this game, and is performed from the production of the third continuous production game of FIG. 59 (c).

After executing the process of step S2403, the continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S2404. The continuous effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after the process of step S2404 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2405. In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from this game. The bonus game corresponds to a game from the next game in which the first BB or the second BB wins to the end of the bonus. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S2405 is the case where the first BB or the second BB prize is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2406, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus medium effect counter of various counter areas 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus middle effect counter is a counter for executing the effect set for each game according to the progress of the bonus game, and the effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the bonus games of the first BB and the second BB, the winning combination in which nine medals are paid out in each game is won, and the bonus ends with the payout of 216 medals. That is, the bonus games of the first BB and the second BB end in 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned bonus medium effect counter is a counter for grasping which game of the 24 games should be produced. Is. Then, in step S2406, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games, and the subtraction process of the bonus effect counter is performed in each game of the bonus game. After the processing of step S2406 is performed, in step S2407, the bonus middle effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The bonus during effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the bonus during effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, or after the process of step S2407 is executed, the bonus notification process is terminated.

<Process for notifying specific role>
Next, the specific combination notification process executed in step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2501, a special notification process is executed. In the special notification process, for example, by winning a specific combination, notification that there is an expectation for a bonus duplicate winning, notification that there is an expectation for a transition to an attack mode or a VB mode, or an addition is performed. The special notification process will be described in detail later.

After performing the process of step S2501, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the precursor command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the precursor command is not included, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the additional command is included as the start command of this time. If the addition command is not included, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won a specific role as a result of the lottery, you have not won the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or the lottery for adding the number of continuous games. If the bonus is not won, the lottery process in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2505. Pseudo-precursor mode is difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode in appearance, but in the precursor mode, the player is notified of favorable results (such as winning the challenge mode) based on the end of the number of precursor games. The pseudo-precursor mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player a favorable result based on the end of the pseudo-precursor game number.

In step S2505, a table for pseudo precursor mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of ROM 182, and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 183b, and a lottery for whether or not to execute the pseudo precursor mode is performed. conduct. In the table for the pseudo-precursor mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo-precursor mode lottery is set to be different depending on the type of the specific winning combination. For example, strong cherries 1 and 2 are weak cherries. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo omen mode is higher than that.

In step S2506, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2505. If the player has won, the lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo omen mode is performed in step S2507. This process corresponds to step S808 or the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo omen games of 1 out of 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the following step S2508, a process of setting the number of pseudo omen games determined in step S2507 in the continuous effect counter is performed. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after the continuous production. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous effect counter in step S2508, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous effect (remaining 4 games), continuous effect is started. It will be.

In step S2509, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating that the pseudo precursor mode is set is executed in the various flag storage areas 183a. In the following step S2510, the continuous effect flag is set. After that, the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2502 to S2504, or if a negative determination is made in step S2506, the specific combination notification process is terminated as it is.

<Continuous staging setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1909 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command received this time. When the precursor command is included, in step S2602, the process of inputting the precursor game number of the precursor mode included in the precursor command to the continuous effect counter is performed. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (4 games remaining), continuous production is started. In the following step S2603, the continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or after the process of step S2603 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is a number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2608, and the effect table for this precursor is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2609, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for this precursor and the effect counter for the continuous effect, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the effect data of this time is continuously produced. Performs the process of setting as. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for this precursor, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, it is the effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is the production data indicating that the continuous production of this time ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, a pseudo precursor effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2611, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the pseudo precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the continuous effect of this time is obtained. Performs the process of setting as. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the pseudo precursor effect table, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game or the effect data indicating that the continuous effect does not continue is used. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the continuous effect this time ends with a failure.

The effect data specified from the pseudo-precursor effect table when the continuous effect counters are 1 to 3 include those for which continuous effect is not set. For example, when the continuous effect counters are 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect continues until the next game of FIG. 59 (a). When the staging data of the first staging game is set and the continuous staging counter is 0, the staging data of the second staging game indicating that the staging is not continued until the next game is set in FIG. 59 (b). By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the middle of the game in which the number of pseudo omen games in the pseudo omen mode is 0.

After performing the process of step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0. When the continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after the process of step S2613 is performed, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether or not the bonusing effect flag is set. If it is set, the subtraction process of the bonus middle effect counter is performed in step S2615. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the effect counter during the bonus is performed. In the following step S2616, a bonus effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2617, the effect data of the corresponding bonus effect is specified from the bonus effect table and the bonus effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b, and the effect during this bonus is produced. Performs the process of setting as. In step S2618, it is determined whether or not the effect counter during the bonus is 0. If the bonus effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the bonus effect flag is performed in step S2619. After that, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the lottery process on the main control device 101 side is performed based on the insertion of the medal as the game medium and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are When the rotation is started, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds. In the configuration in which the privilege is given, a plurality of RT states having different probabilities of replay as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state shifts when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay wins. Whether or not the corresponding replay is won is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the notification of the operation order is performed according to the result of the lottery process. It is done by winning the lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell winning and win a medal. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as the gaming state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the notification of the operation order is performed, the push is performed in the RT state with the replay probability improved. It is possible to win a prize in the order bell, and it is possible to win a large number of medals.

The events that trigger the acquisition of a large number of medals are the transition lottery for the display mode, the execution of the additional lottery for the number of continuous games such as the attack mode, and the winning in the bonus winning / failing lottery. It occurs when you win a specific role such as watermelon, weak watermelon, chances A and B, and middle bell. That is, as a specific combination, a small combination (single combination) or a duplicate combination of IV = 13 to 22, 35 to 48 is set, and when these specific combinations are won, a display mode transition lottery or a lottery for shifting to the display mode is set as an opportunity event. An additional lottery will be held, or a bonus lottery will be won. A specific role is a role that is won with a relatively lower probability than a bell or a replay, and is also called a rare role. Therefore, the player plays each game while expecting the occurrence of such a relatively low-probability trigger event.

Here, the display mode transition lottery based on the specific combination and the bonus winning / failing lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery table for the normal gaming state, the display mode transition lottery, and the set value.

As already explained, as the specific role, a single role such as a strong cherry with IV = 13 to 22 and an overlapping role with a bonus of IV = 35 to 48 are set.

The bonuses of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB are the winning flags corresponding to the bonus winning when the winning combination with the bonus of IV = 35 to 48 is won and when the bonus single role of IV = 49,50 is won. 1BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag) is set. On the other hand, if IV = 13 to 22 is won as a single role, the bonus will not be won twice. That is, when it is determined in step S305 of the lottery process of FIG. 16 that the winner is won at IV = 13-22, the winning flag (strong cherry 1) of the small winning combination corresponding to these IV = 13-22 is determined in step S308. Winning flag, strong cherry 2 winning flag, weak cherry winning flag, strong watermelon 1 winning flag, strong watermelon 2 winning flag, strong watermelon 3 winning flag, weak watermelon winning flag, chance A winning flag, chance B winning flag, middle bell winning (Flag) is set, but the bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag) is not set in step S307. In other words, the trigger event as a bonus winning occurs in the game won in IV = 35 to 48, and does not occur in the game won in IV = 13 to 22, except for the single winning of the bonus at IV = 49,50. ..

The probability of occurrence of a bonus winning event differs depending on the set value that causes a change in the payout rate. That is, the probability of winning at IV = 35 to 48 is set so as to differ depending on the set value. For example, the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 (IV = 35) is set to the most winning in settings 1 and 2. The winning probability is set so that it is difficult and the settings 5 and 6 are the easiest to win. As for the probability of winning the weak watermelon duplication 1, 2 (IV = 41, 42), the winning probability is set so that the setting 1 and 2 are the easiest to win and the settings 5 and 6 are the most difficult to win. .. For many duplicates, the higher the setting (the larger the setting value), the higher the winning probability. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability of each bonus of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. The higher the value and the lower the setting, the lower the probability of winning.

The display mode transition lottery is carried out when the single winning combination of IV = 13 to 22 is won, while it is not carried out when the overlapping winning combination of IV = 35 to 48 is won. Note that FIG. 60 shows a lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the normal mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the challenge mode as the lottery for shifting to the ART. However, the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and the VB mode are shown. The lottery to move to, the lottery to move to the special zone, and the lottery to add the number of continuous games in challenge mode and attack mode are also carried out when the single role of IV = 13 to 22 is won, and IV = 35 to 48. It will not be implemented if you win the duplicate role of. That is, the trigger event such as the display mode transition lottery or the additional lottery occurs in the game won in IV = 13 to 22, and does not occur in the game won in IV = 35 to 48.

Unlike the trigger event as the bonus winning, the trigger event related to the display mode is defined so that the probability of occurrence does not differ depending on the set value. That is, for IV = 13 to 22, the same winning probability is set regardless of the set value, and the winning probability of the transition lottery and the additional lottery is the same regardless of the set value. For example, in the attack mode transition lottery, as shown in FIG. 60, when the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode and the winner is won at IV = 13 to 22, the transition lottery is performed, and other roles are performed. If you win, the transition lottery will not be held. In particular, when winning at IV = 35 to 48, where the winning probability differs depending on the set value, it is set so that the attack mode transition lottery is not performed. The probability of winning the attack mode transition lottery is the same for IV = 13 to 22 regardless of the set value. Although not shown, not only the lottery for transition to attack mode, but also the lottery for transition to challenge mode, the lottery for transition to VB mode, the lottery for transition to special zone, and the lottery for adding the number of continuous games in challenge mode and attack mode. The same winning probability and the same number of additional games are set regardless of the set value.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first advantageous state as a bonus state that becomes advantageous for the player by changing the probability (lottery table) of the winning / losing lottery of the small winning combination and the notification of the operation order of the pushing order combination are notified. Comparing with the second advantageous state such as the attack mode which becomes advantageous state for the player by being performed, the winning probability (transition probability) differs depending on the set value for the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state. It is stipulated that the winning probability (transition probability) does not differ depending on the set value.

The real thrill of the so-called slot machine game is that each game has a winning / losing lottery for the winning combination, and each reel is stopped according to the result. There is also the idea that the second advantageous state to get a reel is a secondary game. From that point of view, although it is permissible that the winning probability of the first advantageous state differs depending on the set value, it is not preferable that the winning probability differs even with respect to the second advantageous state of the above-mentioned secondary game. Conceivable. If the winning probability of even the above-mentioned secondary game differs depending on the set value, the difference in the payout rate due to the winning probability of each role, which is the main game, becomes small, and as a result, the master-slave of the game is reversed. This is because there is a possibility that it will end up.

Therefore, by adjusting the ball ejection rate according to the first advantageous state as described above and treating the second advantageous state as a secondary game to the last, these first advantageous states are not eliminated without eliminating the original game characteristics of the slot machine. It is possible to realize playability by linking the state and the second advantageous state.

With respect to such a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, both advantageous states are carried out separately, and both states are set so as not to overlap. That is, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the first BB or the second BB is won and the bonus state (BB state) is entered, the bonus state is maintained until the specified number of payouts are made, and the RT state or the like is entered. No migration occurs. In addition, the display mode also shifts to the BB mode, and the BB mode that takes until the bonus state ends is maintained (the shift to the attack mode or the like does not occur). Then, if the first BB or the second BB is won during the attack mode, the display mode shifts to the BB mode, and the attack mode is restarted after the BB mode ends (FIG. 39).

On the other hand, the configuration is such that a trigger event of the other advantageous state can occur during one advantageous state. More specifically, during the first advantageous state, which is the main game, it is a subordinate game and no trigger event (attack mode transition lottery, additional lottery, etc.) related to the second advantageous state occurs, but during the second advantageous state, The structure is such that an opportunity event (bonus winning) related to the first advantageous state can occur. Specifically, in each small winning combination (IV = 32 to 34) in the bonus state as the first advantageous state, the attack mode transition lottery, the additional lottery, etc. are not performed, and the trigger event regarding the second advantageous state does not occur. .. On the other hand, in the attack mode or VB mode as the second advantageous state, the duplicate combination of IV = 35 to 48 and the bonus single combination of IV = 49,50 can be won, so that an opportunity event regarding the first advantageous state may occur. .. In this way, while limiting the overlapping implementation of both advantageous states, the other trigger event can occur, so that a chain of both advantageous states is likely to occur, and the interest is improved.

Here, in the bonus state as the first advantageous state, the specific combination that is the trigger event of the second advantageous state is not won, but in the carry-over state after the bonus is won until the transition to the bonus state. Can win a specific role. That is, as already explained, in the situation where one of the bonus winning flags is set in the lottery process, even if the winning is won at IV = 35 to 51 in the lottery table for the normal gaming state, the bonus winning flag or the CB winning is won. The flag is not set. Therefore, in the situation where the bonus is won, the occurrence of the event that can win any bonus is prevented, but it is a specific role of IV = 13 to 22 that triggers the trigger event such as attack mode. You can win. On the other hand, in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), even if these specific combinations are won in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, the first specific combination process to the third specific combination process are not executed. Therefore, no trigger event such as attack mode occurs. That is, in the carry-over state, the trigger event itself of the second advantageous state occurs, but the trigger event itself does not occur. By doing so, the master-slave relationship between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be satisfactorily secured.

However, with such a configuration, if the player wins at IV = 13 to 22 during the carry-over state, the player feels lost because the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is not performed. there is a possibility. Then, after winning the bonus, it is preferable for the player to immediately shift to the bonus so as not to make the loss.

However, there may be an event in which it is difficult to establish a bonus prize when the bonus is won. One is the case where it is difficult to notify that the bonus has been won. As already explained, in the present embodiment, when the bonus is won, the bonus winning is notified via the precursor mode and the continuous production. (Figs. 51 to 53). In such a configuration, the longer the detection of winning the bonus is delayed, the more it is possible to enjoy the continuous production, but on the other hand, it is possible to win a specific role in which the above-mentioned attack mode transition lottery is not performed. The sex becomes high.

Another event is that even if an attempt is made to establish a bonus prize in a situation where the bonus is won, the bonus cannot be won by control. That is, as already described, in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in step S315, the pull-in priority is set in the situation where a plurality of winning combinations are duplicated. As the priority of the pull-in priority, the replay is set to have the highest priority, the small winning combination has the highest priority, and the bonus has the lowest priority. For example, if a replay (IV = 1-12) or a bell role (IV = 24-31) is won in a situation where a bonus is won, the replay or small role winning is prioritized over the bonus winning. , The bonus cannot be won, and the replay and bell win. In other words, even if you try to win a bonus, you cannot win a bonus in a game that has won another role, so there is a high possibility that you will win a specific role that will trigger the second advantageous state. Become.

Further, the bonus winning of the first BB and the second BB is established when the symbol corresponding to the winning mode stops on the effective line. The winning mode of the first BB and the winning mode of the second BB are set so as not to be stopped depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. That is, depending on the mode of the stop operation, even if an attempt is made to establish a bonus prize, the corresponding symbol may not be stopped and the bonus prize may not be established.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the carry-over state of the first advantageous state (bonus), a characteristic control is performed when a specific combination that is a trigger event related to the second advantageous state is won. The configuration will be described below.

<Stop information setting process>
In the present embodiment, a mode of stop drive control when a strong cherry 2 (IV = 14) or a strong watermelon 2, 3 (IV = 17, 18) is won as a predetermined combination among specific combinations during the carry-over state. To change. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop information setting process in the present embodiment. As described above, the stop information setting process is the process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 16).

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the strong cherry 2 has been won as a result of the lottery process this time. As the strong cherry, in addition to the strong cherry 2 of IV = 14, the strong cherry 1 of IV = 13, the strong cherry duplication 1 of IV = 35, and the strong cherry duplication 2 of IV = 36 are set. In step S2701, when the strong cherry 2 is won among these various strong cherries, an affirmative determination is made. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, it is determined in step S2702 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the right reel restriction process is executed in step S2703. If the bonus winning flag is set, the right reel first restriction release process is executed in step S2704. The restriction process in step S2703 is a process in which the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set as the first control mode, and a part of the symbols that can be stopped as a strong cherry is restricted. The restriction release process in step S2704 is a process in which the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set as the second control mode, and the partial restriction of the symbol that can be stopped as a strong cherry is released. In addition, other strong cherries (strong cherry 1, strong cherry duplication 1, strong cherry duplication 2) different from the above strong cherry 2 are not subjected to the right reel restriction release processing, and the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag (carry-over state). Regardless of (whether or not), the stop mode of the right reel is always the first control mode.

FIG. 62 shows the relationship between the winning mode when the weak cherry, the strong cherry 1, 2, the weak watermelon, and the strong watermelon 1 to 3 are won. Further, FIG. 63 shows the change in the winning mode at the time of winning the strong cherry before and after the transition of the carry-over state. In FIG. 62, only the main small roles (27th small role, 28th small role, 29th small role, 30th small role, 41st small role) at the time of winning of each combination are displayed, and the control combination is displayed. Other small roles such as (32nd small role to 35th small role, 42nd small role, 43rd small role, 44th small role) are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the weak cherries with IV = 15 and IV = 37,38 have duplicated roles including the 27th small role and the 32nd to 35th small roles (IV = 37,38 is the second). 1BB or 2nd BB is included). For weak cherries, no stop limit is set for any of the combinations, and if each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped, it will stop in the corresponding winning mode and the weak cherry winning will be given. To establish. For weak cherries, if the winning is established only by the stop symbol of the left reel 32L and the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is stopped on the effective line of the left reel 32L, the other reels 32M, 32R Winning is established regardless of the stop symbol of.

Strong cherries with IV = 13,14 and IV = 35,36 are duplicated roles including the 28th small role and the 32nd small role to the 35th small role (IV = 35,36 includes the 1st BB or the 2nd BB). Is set as). Of these, the strong cherry 1 with IV = 13 is a duplicate of the 28th small role and the 32nd to 35th small roles, and the strong cherry 2 with IV = 14 is the small role of these strong cherries 1 (the first). In addition to the 28 small roles and the 32nd to 35th small combinations), it is set as an overlapping combination of the 42nd small combination as the control combination 1.

The 28th small role has multiple winning modes, and on the effective line, the left reel 32L has a "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol, and the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" symbol, "white bell". The winning mode where the symbol or "cherry" symbol, the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the middle reel 32M By stopping the "white BAR" symbol, a winning mode is set in which a winning is established regardless of the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R. Of these, the winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M is a winning mode that differs depending on whether or not the restriction release process of step S2704 is performed.

That is, the first winning mode in the 28th small winning combination is set so that the winning is established as a so-called triple cherry in which the "cherry" symbol can stop in a straight line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the 3-bet game. Has been done. In the following description, the above-mentioned winning mode is also referred to as a first winning mode of strong cherry.

The second winning mode in the 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is restricted. It is a winning mode. In this winning mode, although the 28th small winning combination is established regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R, the stop drive control is performed so that the "white BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R. In other words, in the 3-bet game, the "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol does not stop in the right reel 32R. Is established. In the following description, the above-mentioned winning mode is also referred to as a second winning mode of strong cherry.

The third winning mode in the 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the first restriction release process of the right reel 32R is performed. It is a winning mode when it is performed. Also in this winning mode, although the 28th small winning combination is established regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R, the stop drive control is performed so that the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R. That is, in the 3-bet game, the "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and for the right reel 32R, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "white BAR" symbol in the middle row, the "white" symbol is stopped in the middle row. The prize is established when the "BAR" symbol is stopped and the middle white BAR is aligned. In the following description, the above-mentioned winning mode is also referred to as a third winning mode of strong cherry.

By performing the right reel limiting process in step S2703, the stop of the third winning mode among the winning modes of the 28th small winning combination in the strong cherry 2 is restricted. As a result, for the 28th small winning combination, winning can be established in the first winning mode and the second winning mode. On the other hand, by performing the right reel first restriction release process in step S2704, the winning can be established in any of the winning modes of the 28th small winning combination in the strong cherry 2.

That is, as shown in FIG. 63, in the situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, when the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong cherries overlap 1 and 2 are won, any of the strong cherries is a triple cherry. If you perform a stop operation aiming at, the triple cherry will stop, and if you perform a stop operation so that the middle white BAR will come off, the middle white BAR will stop, but the stop operation will be aligned with the middle white BAR. Even if you do, the middle white BAR alignment does not stop. In other words, if you win any of the strong cherries in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, that is, in a situation where you are not in a carry-over state, even if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left For the reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage, but for the right reel 32R, the "white BAR" symbol does not stop.

On the other hand, in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if the strong cherry 2 is won among various strong cherries, the triple cherries will be stopped if the stop operation is performed aiming at the triple cherries, and the middle white If the stop operation is performed so that the BAR tempai is out, the middle white BAR is stopped, and if the stop operation is performed so that the middle white BAR is aligned, the middle white BAR alignment is stopped. In other words, if you win the strong cherry 2 with the bonus winning flag set, if you aim for the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "white BAR" symbol will be stopped in the middle row. Is possible.

On the other hand, even if the bonus winning flag is set, if you win the strong cherry 1 or the strong cherry duplication 1 and 2 among various strong cherries, stop operation aiming at the triple cherry. If this is done, the triple cherry will stop, and if the stop operation is performed so that the middle white BAR is out of the way, the middle white BAR will be out of the middle white BAR. The middle white BAR lineup does not stop. That is, in the case of these strong cherries, the winning mode does not change regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag.

In the priority setting process of step S315, when the strong cherry 2 is won in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, the third winning mode among the first to third winning modes is preferentially stopped. Set to let. Therefore, in such a situation, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the third prize mode can be stopped, the 28th small winning combination prize (strong cherry prize) is established in the third prize mode, and the third prize mode is established. If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the winning mode cannot be stopped, the 28th small winning combination (strong cherry winning) is established in the first winning mode or the second winning mode.

Comparing the second winning mode and the third winning mode of the strong cherry, the stop mode of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M is common, and only the stop mode of the right reel 32R is different. That is, in the stop information setting process, when the right reel restriction process of step S2703 is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set as the first control mode for preventing the "white BAR" symbol from stopping, and step S2704. When the right reel first restriction release process is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set to the second control mode so that the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped. The stop drive control is different and is common in other respects.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the strong cherry 2 is not won in the stop information setting process, the process proceeds to step S2705. In step S2705, it is determined whether or not the strong watermelons 2 and 3 have been won as a result of the lottery process this time. Strong watermelons include IV = 17 strong watermelon 2, IV = 18 strong watermelon 3, IV = 16 strong watermelon 1, IV = 39 strong watermelon duplication 1, and IV = 40 strong watermelon duplication 2. Has been done. In step S2705, when the strong watermelon 2 or the strong watermelon 3 is won among these various strong watermelons, an affirmative determination is made. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2705, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the right reel restriction process is executed in step S2707. If the bonus winning flag is set, it is determined in step S2708 whether or not the current strong watermelon is the strong watermelon 3. When the strong watermelon 2 is used instead of the strong watermelon 3, the right reel first restriction release process is executed in step S2709. On the other hand, in the case of the strong watermelon 3, the right reel second restriction release process is executed in step S2710. The restriction process in step S2707 is a process in which the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set as the first control mode, and a part of the symbols that can be stopped as a strong watermelon is restricted. The first restriction release process in step S2709 is a process in which the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set as the second control mode, and the partial restriction of the symbol that can be stopped as a strong watermelon is released. The second restriction release process in step S2710 is a process in which the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set as the third control mode, and all restrictions on the symbols that can be stopped as a strong watermelon are released. In addition, other strong watermelons (strong watermelon 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 2) different from the above strong watermelons 2 and 3 are not subjected to the right reel restriction release processing, and the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag (existence of bonus winning flag). Regardless of whether it is in the carry-over state or not), the stop mode of the right reel is always the first control mode.

FIG. 64 shows changes in the winning mode when the strong watermelon is won before and after the transition to the carry-over state.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 62, the weak watermelons with IV = 19 and IV = 41,42 have duplicate combinations including the 29th small combination and the 41st small combination (IV = 41, 42 is the first BB or the first BB). 2BB is included). For weak watermelon, no stop limit is set for any of the combinations, and if each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped, it will stop in the corresponding winning mode and the weak watermelon winning will be awarded. To establish. In the weak watermelon, in the 3-bet game, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the downward-sloping line L4 and the prize is established, or the "watermelon" symbol does not stop only on the middle reel 32M. Is established.

Strong watermelons with IV = 16-18 and IV = 39,40 are set as duplicate roles including the 30th and 41st small roles (IV = 36,37 includes the 1st BB or the 2nd BB). ing. Of these, the strong watermelon 1 with IV = 16 is an overlapping role of the 30th small role and the 41st small role, and the strong watermelon 2 with IV = 17 is the small role of these strong watermelon 1 (30th small role, 1st). In addition to the 41 small combination), it is set as an overlapping combination of the 43rd small combination as the control combination 2. The strong watermelon 1 with IV = 18 is set as a duplicate of the 44th small role as the control combination 3 in addition to the small combination (30th small role, 41st small role) of the strong watermelon 1. ..

The 30th small winning combination has multiple winning modes, and the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. The winning mode is set, and the winning mode is set regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R by stopping the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M. There is. Of these, the winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M is different depending on whether or not the restriction release processing of step S2709 or step S2710 is performed. There is.

That is, the first winning mode in the 30th small winning combination is such that in the 3-bet game, the winning is established as a so-called upper watermelon matching, in which the "watermelon" symbols can be aligned and stopped on the upper row of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. It is set. In the following description, the above-mentioned winning mode is also referred to as a first winning mode of strong watermelon.

The second winning mode in the 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is restricted. It is a winning mode. In this winning mode, although the 28th small winning combination is established regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R, the stop drive control is performed so that the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R. In other words, in the 3-bet game, the "black BAR" symbol forms a tempai line on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M on the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5, but on the right reel 32R, it is on either line. "Black BAR" does not stop, and the prize is established by the stop result that the cross black BAR is off. In the following description, the above-mentioned winning mode is also referred to as a second winning mode of strong watermelon.

The third winning mode in the 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the first restriction release process of the right reel 32R is performed. It is a winning mode when it is performed. In this winning mode, the 28th small winning combination is established regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R, but in the right reel 32R, the "black BAR" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, but not in the lower row. Stop drive control is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, in the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5, the "black BAR" symbol forms a tempai line with the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol is on the upper stage of the right reel 32R. Is stopped and the black BAR alignment is established on the right-up line L5, while the black BAR alignment is not established on the right-down line L4, and the prize is established as a stop result in which the cross black BAR single alignment is established. In the following description, the above-mentioned winning mode is also referred to as a third winning mode of strong watermelon.

The third winning mode in the 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the second restriction release process of the right reel 32R is performed. It is a winning mode when it is performed. In this winning mode, the 28th small winning combination is established regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R, but in the right reel 32R, the stop drive control is performed so that the "black BAR" symbol can be stopped in the upper and lower rows. Will be done. That is, in the 3-bet game, in the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5, the "black BAR" symbol forms a tempai line on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" on the upper and lower rows of the right reel 32R. The winning result is the cross black BAR double alignment where the symbols are stopped and the black BAR alignment is established on both tempai lines L4 and L5. In the following description, the above-mentioned winning mode is also referred to as a fourth winning mode of strong watermelon.

By performing the right reel limiting process in step S2707, the suspension of the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode among the winning modes of the 30th small winning combination in the strong watermelons 2 and 3 is restricted. As a result, for the 30th small winning combination, winning can be established in the first winning mode and the second winning mode. On the other hand, by performing the right reel first restriction release process in step S2709, the stop restriction of the third winning mode among the winning modes of the 30th small winning combination in the strong watermelon 2 is released. As a result, for the 30th small winning combination of the strong watermelon 2, the winning can be established in any one of the first winning mode to the third winning mode. Then, by performing the right reel second restriction release process in step S2710, the 30th small winning combination in the strong watermelon 3 can be won in any winning mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 64, when the strong watermelons 1 to 3 and the strong watermelon duplications 1 and 2 are won in the situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, the upper watermelon regardless of which strong watermelon is used. If you perform a stop operation aiming for alignment, the upper watermelon alignment will stop, and if you perform a stop operation so that the cross black BAR is out of the cross black BAR, the cross black BAR will be out of the single alignment or double alignment. Even if the stop operation is performed so as to be, the single alignment and double alignment of the cross black BAR are not stopped. In other words, if you win any of the strong watermelons in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, that is, in a situation where you are not in a carry-over state, even if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left For the reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol stops and becomes a double tempai, but for the right reel 32R, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop.

On the other hand, in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if the strong watermelon 2 is won among various strong watermelons, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the upper watermelon alignment, the upper watermelon alignment is stopped and the cross. If the stop operation is performed so that the black BAR is out of the black BAR, the cross black BAR out of the cross black BAR is stopped, and if the stop operation is performed so that the cross black BAR singles are aligned, the cross black BAR singles are stopped. However, when the strong watermelon 2 is won, the cross black BAR double alignment does not stop even if the stop operation is performed so that the cross black BAR double alignment is performed even in the carry-over state. In other words, when the bonus winning flag is set, that is, when the strong watermelon 2 is won in the carry-over state, if you aim for the "black BAR" pattern on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, you will get a cross black BAR single. It is possible to stop the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R so as to be.

Then, in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if the strong watermelon 3 is won among various strong watermelons, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the upper watermelon alignment, the upper watermelon alignment is stopped and the cross. If the stop operation is performed so that the black BAR is out, the cross black BAR is stopped, and if the stop operation is performed so that the cross black BAR single is aligned, the cross black BAR single alignment is stopped and the cross black BAR double alignment is performed. If the stop operation is performed so as to be, the cross black BAR double alignment is stopped. In other words, when the bonus winning flag is set, that is, when the strong watermelon 3 is won in the carry-over state, if you aim for the "black BAR" pattern on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, you will get a cross black BAR double lineup. It is possible to stop the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R so as to be.

On the other hand, even if the bonus winning flag is set, if you win the strong watermelon 1 or the strong watermelon duplication 1 and 2 among various strong watermelons, stop operation aiming at the upper watermelons. If this is done, the upper watermelon alignment will stop, and if the stop operation is performed so that the cross black BAR is out of alignment, the cross black BAR disengagement will be stopped, but even if the stop operation is performed so that the cross black BAR single alignment is performed. The cross black BAR single alignment does not stop, and even if the stop operation is performed so that the cross black BAR double alignment is performed, the cross black BAR double alignment does not stop. That is, in the case of these strong watermelons, the winning mode does not change regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag.

In the priority setting process of step S315, when the strong watermelon 2 is won in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, the third winning mode among the first to third winning modes is preferentially stopped. Set to let. Therefore, in such a situation, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the third winning mode can be stopped, the strong watermelon winning is established in the third winning mode, and the timing at which the third winning mode cannot be stopped. When the stop operation is performed in, a strong watermelon prize is established in the first prize mode or the second prize mode.

In addition, in the priority setting process, when the strong watermelon 3 is won in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, the fourth winning mode among the first to fourth winning modes is preferentially stopped. It is set, and a third winning mode is set as the next priority. Therefore, in such a situation, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the fourth winning mode can be stopped, the strong watermelon winning is established in the fourth winning mode, and the timing at which the fourth winning mode cannot be stopped. When the stop operation is performed in, the strong watermelon prize is established in the third winning mode, and when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the fourth and third winning modes cannot be stopped, the first A strong watermelon prize is established in the first prize mode or the second prize mode.

Comparing the second winning mode to the fourth winning mode of the strong watermelon, the stop mode of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common, and only the stop mode of the right reel 32R is different. That is, in the stop information setting process, when the right reel restriction process of step S2707 is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set as the first control mode for preventing the "black BAR" symbol from stopping in the upper to lower stages. When the right reel first restriction release process in step S2709 is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R can be stopped by the "black BAR" symbol in the upper row and cannot be stopped by the "black BAR" symbol in the lower row. When the right reel second restriction release process in step S2710 is performed, the stop drive control of the right reel 32R is set so that the "black BAR" symbol can be stopped in the upper and lower stages. The stop drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is different in that it is a third control mode, and is common in other points.

After any of the processes of step S2703, step S2704, step S2707, step S2709 and step S2710, or a negative determination in step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2711. In step S2711, the process of storing the information of the stop mode set in each process in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 is performed, and then the main stop information setting process is terminated. Then, in the priority setting process of step S315 in the lottery process, the winning combination, the winning mode thereof, and the priority thereof are set by using the information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

As described above, the winning mode of the strong cherry and the strong watermelon changes depending on whether or not it is in the carry-over state. Here, a game mode recommended for establishing a prize for each small winning combination including a specific winning combination will be described.

Among the winning combinations in each game, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons are set as the so-called missed roles that cannot be won by the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry 1 and 2 and the strong cherry duplication 1 and 2 are the roles in which any of the 28th small role and the 31st small role to the 35th small role can win, left. The 28th small winning combination symbol, the 31st small winning combination symbol to the 35th small winning combination symbol for the reel 32L are a "cherry" symbol, a "second replay" symbol, and a "black BAR" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, the 11th "1st replay" symbol from the 7th "red bell" symbol and the 20th "white bell" symbol from the 19th "1st replay" symbol are the left reel 32L. When the left reel 32L is stopped when the upper row is reached, the 28th small winning combination symbol, the 31st small winning combination symbol to the 35th small winning combination symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "second replay" symbol, and the "second replay" symbol are performed. None of the "Black BAR" symbols can be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong cherry role will be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a role in which any of the 27th small role and the 31st small role to the 35th small role can win a prize, but the 27th small role symbol and the 31st small role symbol for the left reel 32L are the 31st small role symbols. The 35 small role symbols are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "red bell" symbol to the 20th "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the above-mentioned first operation is performed. Neither the 27 small winning combination symbol, the 31st small winning combination symbol to the 35th small winning combination symbol, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak cherry role is missed.

The strong watermelons 1 to 3 and the strong watermelon duplications 1 and 2 are the roles in which either the 30th small role or the 41st small role can win, but the 30th small role symbol and the 41st small role for the left reel 32L. The symbols are a "watermelon" symbol and a "black BAR" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, the 9th "Red 7" symbol to the 11th "1st replay" symbol and the 19th "1st replay" symbol to the 3rd "white bell" symbol are the left reel 32L. When the left reel 32L is stopped when the upper row is reached, both the 30th small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol "watermelon" symbol and "black BAR" symbol are stopped at the effective line. Can't. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon role will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination of either the 29th small winning combination or the 41st small winning combination, whereas the 29th small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol for the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 3rd "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 29th The small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon role is missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped and operated while leaving the possibility of winning any of the roles that may be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol is the left reel 32L. It is necessary to stop the operation when the upper row is reached. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a dropout, and each operation mode in which the above-mentioned dropout occurs is a non-specific operation. Also referred to as a mode (second operation mode).

When the left reel 32L is operated in a specific operation mode, when any of the strong cherries is won, a prize is established in the second and third winning modes among the first to third winning modes of the strong cherry. Instead, the winning will be established in the first winning mode. Similarly, when the left reel 32L is operated in a specific operation mode, when any of the strong watermelons is won, in the second to fourth winning modes of the first to fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon. The winning will not be established, and the winning will be established in the first winning mode. That is, in the case of winning these strong cherries and strong watermelons, if a prize is to be established in each winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the stopping operation mode becomes a non-specific operation mode. Weak cherries and weak watermelons cannot be followed when they are won, and these weak cherries and weak watermelons will be missed.

Furthermore, when trying to win a strong cherry or a strong watermelon in each winning mode in which the "black BAR" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, one of the strong cherry or the strong watermelon is missed on the middle reel 32M. Can also occur. Specifically, the 28th small winning combination symbol corresponding to the strong cherry of the middle reel 32M when the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L is the "white BAR" symbol. On the other hand, the 30th small winning combination symbol corresponding to the strong watermelon of the middle reel 32M when the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L is the "black BAR" symbol. In the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol are arranged so as to be separated from each other by four or more symbols. Therefore, for the middle reel 32M, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the "black BAR" symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line, and the "black BAR" symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the "white BAR" symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. In other words, if you stop the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and then aim for the symbol corresponding to the strong cherry prize for the middle reel 32M, the strong watermelon will be missed and you will aim for the symbol corresponding to the strong watermelon prize. And, the strong cherry is missed.

From the above relationship, normally, in order to prevent the missing of each combination, the left reel 32L is stopped and operated in a specific operation mode, and the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are normally stopped according to the stop result. It is recommended to perform the stop operation of. In other words, as long as the stop operation is performed in the recommended specific operation mode, the second and third winning modes of the strong cherry and the second to fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon do not appear.

<Special notification processing>
Next, the processing related to the notification at the time of winning the specific combination will be described. The notification at the time of winning the specific combination is executed by the special notification process in the specific combination notification process (FIG. 52). As described above, the specific combination notification process is a process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65 (a), in the special notification process, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the carry-over state is achieved. Whether or not it is in the carry-over state can be determined by whether or not the carry-over command (see step S613) has been received from the main control device 101. If it is determined that the state is not carried over, the process of setting the chance notification effect is performed in step S2802. In the chance notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, the character "Chance !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the characters with the exclamation mark are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, respectively. Display each corresponding to 32R. In addition, in the chance notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "cui" by an electronic sound) is emitted.

Although it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is one of the specific roles in the chance notification effect, it is set so that it cannot be determined or it is difficult to determine which specific role it is. That is, when the chance notification effect is performed, it is highly possible that the winning role of this game is one of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., but either strong cherry or weak cherry. It is not possible to determine whether there is a strong watermelon, whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), as a player, the left reel 32L is set in the above-mentioned specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout even if any of the specific combinations is won. The operation will be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801 and a specific combination is won during the carry-over state, the process proceeds to step S2803. In step S2803, it is determined whether or not a strong cherry or a strong watermelon has been won as a specific role. If the strong cherry or the strong watermelon is not won, the process proceeds to step S2802 to control the chance notification effect. If the strong cherry or the strong watermelon is won, the process proceeds to step S2804, and a lottery process for whether or not to give a push instruction is executed. In such a lottery process, a lottery instruction lottery table stored in advance in various table storage areas 182a is acquired, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 183b, so that the second to third winning modes of the strong cherry are obtained. (FIG. 63) and a lottery for whether or not to make the second to fourth winning modes (FIG. 64) of the strong watermelon be pressed.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the push instruction lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the execution lottery of the push instruction notification differs depending on the winning combination and the set value for changing the payout rate. ing.

The case where the winning combination this time is the strong cherry 1 is a case where the winning is established in the first winning mode and the second winning mode of the strong cherry, but the winning is not established in the third winning mode. That is, in the case of the strong cherry 1 in the carry-over state, even if the "white BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the middle white BAR is not aligned and the middle white BAR is out of the stop mode. This is the case when the prize is established. In the push instruction lottery table, when the strong cherry 1 is used, it is set not to win the push instruction notification lottery regardless of the set value.

The case where the winning combination this time is the strong cherry 2 is the case where the winning is established in any of the first winning mode to the third winning mode of the strong cherry. That is, in the case of the strong cherry 2 in the carry-over state, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the prize is established in the stop mode in which the middle stage white BAR is aligned. It is a case where it is possible to make it. In the push instruction lottery table, in the case of strong cherry 2, if the set value is 1 to 3, the push instruction notification lottery is not won, and if the set value is 4 to 6, the push instruction notification lottery is not won. It is set to win the push instruction notification lottery with a probability of 50%.

When the winning combination this time is strong watermelon 1, the winning is established in the first winning mode and the second winning mode of the strong watermelon, but the winning is won in the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode. This is the case when it does not hold. That is, in the case of the strong watermelon 1 in the carry-over state, even if the "black BAR" pattern is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the cross black BAR single alignment / double alignment does not occur, and the cross black BAR is off. This is the case where the prize is established in the stop mode. In the push instruction lottery table, when the strong watermelon 1 is used, it is set not to win the push instruction notification lottery regardless of the set value.

The case where the winning combination this time is the strong watermelon 2 is a case where the winning is established in the first winning mode to the third winning mode of the strong watermelon, but the winning is not established in the fourth winning mode. That is, in the case of the strong watermelon 2 in the carry-over state, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the cross black BAR double alignment is not achieved, but the cross black BAR is not aligned. This is a case where it is possible to establish a prize in a stop mode in which singles are aligned. In the push instruction lottery table, when the strong watermelon is 2, if the set value is 1 or 2, the push instruction notification lottery is not won, and if the set value is 3 to 6, the push instruction notification lottery is not won. It is set to win the push instruction notification lottery with a probability of 50%.

The case where the winning combination this time is the strong watermelon 3 is a case where the winning is established in any of the first winning mode to the fourth winning mode of the strong watermelon. That is, in the case of the strong watermelon 3 in the carry-over state, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a prize is won in the stop mode in which the cross black BAR is double-aligned. This is the case when it can be established. In the push instruction lottery table, when the strong watermelon is 3, if the set value is 1 to 5, the push instruction notification lottery is not won, and if the set value is 6, 50%. It is set to win the push instruction notification lottery with the probability of.

After executing the lottery process in step S2804, it is determined in step S2805 whether or not the lottery process has been won. If not won, the process of setting the comprehensive chance notification effect is performed in step S2806. The comprehensive chance notification effect is different from the above chance notification effect, and is an effect of notifying that a strong cherry or a strong watermelon has been won among specific roles. The possibility of weak watermelon is eliminated.

In the comprehensive chance notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image in which the hub character and the mongoose character are intertwined and fighting. Here, the hub and the mongoose are known as so-called natural enemies, and their strengths are in opposition to each other. Therefore, when Habu and Mongoose fight, it can be said that both can win. In this embodiment, the hub corresponds to the strong cherry and the mongoose corresponds to the strong watermelon, and in the comprehensive chance notification production, the battle between the hub and the mongoose can be won by either the strong cherry or the strong watermelon. Corresponds to having sex.

In the comprehensive chance notification production, along with the image of the battle between the hub and the mongoose, the push instruction image for aiming at the "black BAR" or the "white BAR" is also displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, in the comprehensive chance notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "aiming" with a male voice) is emitted.

As described above, in the comprehensive chance notification effect, the notification that the strong cherry or the strong watermelon has been won is performed, so that the possibility of the weak cherry or the weak watermelon is excluded. In that respect, it is also possible to stop the left reel 32L not in the above-mentioned specific operation mode but in a non-specific operation mode aiming at the third winning mode of the strong cherry and the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon. Is. However, as described above, the third winning mode of the strong cherry and the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon are the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R aiming at "white BAR" or "black BAR". Depending on whether you aim, it is a winning mode that may miss the other that you did not aim for.

If the "white BAR" or "black BAR" is stopped for the middle reel 32M after the left reel 32L is stopped, the remaining reels (right reel 32R) can be directed to aim at the left and middle tempai patterns. Switch. If the original comprehensive chance notification effect is displayed, that is, the effect intended to aim at "white BAR" or "black BAR" is displayed as it is, even if the BAR pattern of the same color is tempted, it will be different for the remaining reels. This is because there is a possibility of losing the chance of matching the white BAR and the black BAR by aiming at the color BAR pattern.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the lottery for instructing the push is won, the process proceeds to step S2807. In step S2807, it is determined whether or not the strong cherry has been won. If the strong cherry is won, the comprehensive chance notification effect is set in step S2808. Such processing is the same as in step S2806. That is, the auxiliary display unit 65 directs the battle between the hub and the mongoose.

In the following step S2809, a process of setting the white BAR push instruction notification effect as the first stop OFF effect is performed. The first stop OFF effect is an effect executed based on the stop OFF operation (release of the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44) of the reel to be stopped first in each stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 48). Is.

In the white BAR push instruction notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, as a result of the battle between the hub and the mongoose of the comprehensive chance notification effect, the hub wins. Display a magnified image of the hub character. In addition, a push instruction image for aiming at the "white BAR" symbol is also displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, at the time of the above-mentioned comprehensive chance notification, if the left reel 32L is stopped operation aiming at the third winning mode of the strong cherry and the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon instead of the specific operation mode. , It is possible to prevent the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R from being missed, and it is possible to win a strong cherry in the third winning mode.

In each stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 48), in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the white BAR push instruction notification effect is set as the special notification. When the white BAR push instruction notification effect is set, the "white BAR" symbol is displayed in the middle of the first stop reel, that is, the reel stopped by the stop ON operation immediately before the stop OFF operation this time in step S2210. Determine if it is stopped. If the "white BAR" symbol is not stopped in the middle of the first stop reel, the process of setting the normal OFF effect in step S2209 is performed, and then each stop operation effect setting process is terminated. In this case, as the display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65, the comprehensive chance notification effect set at the start of the game is continued.

When the "white BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the first stop reel, the white BAR push instruction notification effect is set as a special notification in step S2211. That is, even when the white BAR push instruction notification effect is set as the special notification of the first stop OFF effect, when the "white BAR" symbol is not stopped in the middle stage of the first stop reel. The white BAR push instruction notification effect is not executed, and the comprehensive chance notification effect is continued. In other words, even if the player wins in the push instruction effect lottery (step S2804), the stop operation is performed aiming at the "white BAR" symbol, for example, by performing a stop operation on the left reel 32L in a specific operation mode. If this is not performed, the white BAR push instruction notification effect is not executed.

If it is determined in step S2807 that the strong cherry has not been won, it is determined in step S2810 whether or not the strong watermelon has been won. If the strong watermelon is won, the comprehensive chance notification effect is set in step S2811. Such processing is the same as in step S2806. That is, the auxiliary display unit 65 directs the battle between the hub and the mongoose.

In the following step S2812, a process of setting the black BAR push instruction notification effect as the first stop OFF effect is performed. In the black BAR push instruction notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the auxiliary display unit 65, as a result of the battle between the hub and the mongoose of the comprehensive chance notification effect, the mongoose has won. Display a magnified image of a mongoose character. In addition, a push instruction image for aiming at "black BAR" is also displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, at the time of the above-mentioned comprehensive chance notification, if the left reel 32L is stopped operation aiming at the third winning mode of the strong cherry and the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon instead of the specific operation mode. , It is possible to prevent the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R from being missed, and it is possible to win a strong watermelon in the third and fourth winning modes.

In each stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 48), in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the black BAR push instruction notification effect is set as the special notification. When the black BAR push instruction notification effect is set, in step S2210, the reel stopped by the stop ON operation immediately before the stop OFF operation, that is, one of the upper to lower stages of the first stop reel is " It is determined whether or not the "black BAR" symbol is stopped. If the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped in any of the upper to lower stages of the first stop reel, the process for setting the normal OFF effect in step S2209 is performed, and then the effect setting process for each stop operation is performed. finish. In this case, as the display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65, the comprehensive chance notification effect set at the start of the game is continued.

When the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in any of the upper to lower stages of the first stop reel, the black BAR push instruction notification effect is set as a special notification in step S2211. That is, even if the black BAR push instruction notification effect is set as the special notification of the first stop OFF effect, if the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped on the first stop reel, The black BAR push instruction notification effect is not executed, and the comprehensive chance notification effect is continued. In other words, even if the player wins the push instruction effect lottery (step S2804), the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, for example, by performing a stop operation on the left reel 32L in a specific operation mode. If this is not performed, the black BAR push instruction notification effect is not executed.

After executing any of the processes of step S2802, step S2806, step S2809 and step S2812, or when a negative determination is made in step S2810, this special notification process ends.

That is, in the game in which the strong cherry or the strong watermelon is won in the carry-over state, the comprehensive chance notification effect occurs. Then, when the first stop of the game is turned off, the comprehensive chance notification effect may change to a white BAR eye-pressing instruction notification effect or a black BAR eye-pressing instruction notification effect. The case of changing to these push instruction notification effects is the case of winning the push instruction lottery in step S2804, and the winning probability of the lottery differs depending on the winning combination and the set value.

For example, when the left reel 32L is stopped and operated in the above specific operation mode when the comprehensive chance notification effect is generated, and the white BAR push instruction notification effect is generated, the lottery result of this game is strong cherry 1 and strong watermelon. It is determined that the strong cherry 2 is not 1 to 3, and it is determined that the set value is 4 to 6 with a probability of 50%. In other words, if the comprehensive chance notification effect is changed to the white BAR push instruction notification effect, that is, if the battle between the hub and the mongoose is settled by the hub victory, it is confirmed that the set value is not 1 to 3. ..

In addition, when the left reel 32L is stopped and operated in the above specific operation mode when the comprehensive chance notification effect is generated, and the black BAR push instruction notification effect is generated, the lottery result of this game is strong cherry 1, 2, 2. It is determined that the strong watermelons 2 and 3 are not the strong watermelon 1, and it is determined that the set values are not 1 and 2. In this case, if the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are stopped aiming at "black BAR" and the strong watermelon wins in the third winning mode, there is a 50% probability that the setting is 3 to 6. It is determined that there is. Further, when the strong watermelon wins in the fourth winning mode, it is determined that the set value is 6. In other words, when the comprehensive chance notification effect is changed to the black BAR push instruction notification effect, that is, when the battle between the hub and the mongoose is settled by the mongoose victory, it is confirmed that the set value is 3 or more. , If a strong watermelon prize is established in the cross black BAR double match, it is confirmed that the set value is 6. In other words, if there is a battle between Habu and the mongoose, pay attention to the battle, hoping that one of them will win, and if the mongoose wins, pay attention to the stop roll. The points to be played are multi-tiered to improve the interest.

In this way, even if you win the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong watermelons 1 to 3, which should have triggered the lottery such as the attack mode transition lottery in the carry-over state where the bonus winning flag is set. , Instead of not performing such a transition lottery, the setting value is suggested.

However, if the lottery for instructing the push is not won, even if the third winning mode of the strong cherry or the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon are aimed at when the comprehensive chance notification effect occurs, The push instruction notification effect is not executed. For example, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol and the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L when the comprehensive chance notification effect is generated, the "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle row and a strong cherry is displayed. Although there is still room for winning in the second and third winning modes and for winning the strong watermelon in the second to fourth winning modes, it is not possible to win the strong cherry in the first winning mode. It will not be possible, and it will not be possible to make a strong watermelon win in the first winning mode. Then, if the push instruction notification effect does not occur after the comprehensive chance notification effect, the "black BAR" symbol cannot be pulled in when aiming at the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol cannot be pulled in when aiming at the "black BAR" symbol. Since the "white BAR" symbol cannot be pulled in, either strong cherry or strong watermelon may be missed. In that respect, if you do not want to cause such omissions, the push instruction notification effect cannot occur and the setting value is not suggested, but the left reel 32L is specified as the operation mode even when the comprehensive chance notification effect occurs. You can stop it with.

In addition, it is also possible to first stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R instead of the left reel 32L in the situation where the strong cherry or the strong watermelon is won in the carry-over state. For example, if a strong cherry is to be won in the third winning mode, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped in the middle of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. In this case, for the right reel 32R, if the right reel 32R is stopped first, the "white BAR" symbol will not stop in the middle row even when the strong cherry 2 is won in the carry-over state ("red bell"). The symbol does not stop at the bottom), the "cherry" symbol, the "first replay" symbol, or the "second replay" symbol stops at the bottom. Therefore, it is not possible to win a prize in the third winning mode. In this case, even if the lottery for the push instruction is won, the white BAR push instruction notification effect does not occur.

Regarding the middle reel 32M, if the middle reel 32M is first stopped and the "white BAR" symbol is aimed at when the strong cherry is won, the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped in the middle of the middle reel 32M. In this case, the possibility of winning a strong watermelon is excluded. However, since the "white BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the first stop reel, the white BAR push instruction notification effect is performed as the above special notification. On the other hand, when the strong watermelon is won, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "white BAR" symbol can be stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as described above, the stop operation at such timing is the strong watermelon. The "black BAR" symbol, which is the third and fourth winning mode, cannot be stopped from the upper row to the lower row. In this case, for example, in the middle reel 32M, the 19th "red bell" symbol arranged on the downstream side of the 18th "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage, and the strong watermelon wins the first prize. Although there is still room for winning in the mode, the black BAR push instruction notification effect does not occur because the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped on the first stop reel. Further, in the right reel 32R, the 17th "red bell" symbol arranged one upstream side of the 18th "white BAR" symbol or the 20th "red bell" arranged two downstream sides. Although the symbol stops at the bottom and there is still room for the strong watermelon to win in the first winning mode, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the first stop reel, so the black BAR push instruction notification effect is Does not occur.

Further, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is to be stopped first and the strong watermelon is to be won in the third and fourth winning modes, the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is to be "black BAR". It becomes necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing when the symbol can be stopped. In this case, if the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the possibility of winning a strong cherry is excluded, and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the first stop reel. Black BAR push instruction notification effect is performed. On the other hand, in the case where the strong cherry is won, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "black BAR" symbol can be stopped on the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as described above, the stop operation at such timing is the third strong cherry. The "white BAR" symbol, which is the winning mode of, cannot be stopped in the middle row. In this case, for example, in the middle reel 32M, the eleventh "cherry" symbol arranged on the three downstream sides of the eighth "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage, and the strong cherry is the first winning mode. Although there is still room to win a prize, the white BAR push instruction notification effect does not occur because the "white BAR" symbol is not stopped on the first stop reel. Further, in the right reel 32R, the sixth "first replay" symbol arranged one upstream side of the seventh "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "first" arranged four downstream sides. Although the "replay" symbol stops at the bottom and there is still room for the strong cherry to win in the first winning mode, the "white BAR" symbol does not stop on the first stop reel, so the white BAR push instruction notification is given. No production occurs.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the carry-over state where the execution of the transition lottery to the attack mode or the additional lottery such as the attack mode is restricted, the specific role (strong cherry 1, 2 or strong watermelon 1 to 3) that triggers the transition lottery or the additional lottery If you win, you can win a prize with a different stop roll compared to the case where you are not in the carry-over state, so the playability in the carry-over state is improved, and the transition lottery and additional lottery are performed. It is possible to reduce the feeling of loss in the absence.

More specifically, when the specific combination that triggers the above-mentioned transition lottery or additional lottery is won in the carry-over state, the set value is suggested as the presentation of useful information to the player, so that the so-called loss It is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed even in the event of becoming.

If a specific role is won during the carry-over state, the stop result at the time of winning will be different compared to the non-carry-over state. Specifically, when the strong cherry is won, the prize is established in the first prize mode and the second prize mode before the transition to the carry-over state, but the prize is not established in the third prize mode (stopped). do not do). On the other hand, when the carry-over state is entered, the winning is established in any of the first winning mode to the third winning mode. In addition, when the strong watermelon is won, the prize is established in the first prize mode and the second prize mode before the transition to the carry-over state, but the prize is won in the third prize mode and the fourth prize mode. Does not hold (does not stop). On the other hand, when the carry-over state is entered, the winning is established in any of the first winning mode to the fourth winning mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to notify through the change of the stop roll that the specific role has been won during the carry-over state.

When a strong cherry or a strong watermelon is won before the transition to the carry-over state, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the winning mode that can be stopped during the carry-over state, these winning modes are not stopped. This ensures the effectiveness of the stop roll changing depending on the state.

Regardless of whether it is in the carry-over state or not, the winning determination in the second to fourth winning modes of the strong cherry and the strong watermelon is performed by the stop symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R. It was configured. By doing so, when the above-mentioned stop result is changed, it is not necessary to change the winning mode for establishing the winning, and the storage amount of data can be reduced. Further, if the right reel 32R is also configured to determine the stop symbol and determine the winning, for example, the symbol corresponding to the strong cherry applied when the right reel 32R is stopped even though the strong cherry has been won. A special configuration such as performing control that does not stop the reel is required. In that respect, by not using the right reel 32R for the winning determination as described above, there is no inconvenience even if the stopping mode of the right reel 32R at the time of winning a strong cherry or a strong watermelon is changed depending on the state.

When the strong cherries 1 and 2 are won in the carry-over state, the strong cherry 1 is out of the middle white BAR, and the strong cherry 2 is the middle white BAR. In addition, when strong watermelons 1 to 3 are won during the carry-over state, the strong watermelon 1 will be out of the cross black BAR, the strong watermelon 2 will be the cross black BAR single, and the strong watermelon 3 will be the cross black BAR double. I made it. In this way, since the stop result is made different depending on the winning result, the winning result and the winning mode are associated with each other. As a result, even if the winning result is the same, the event of winning in different winning modes does not occur, which is preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game.

Even when the strong cherry 2 is won, if the pressing operation of the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R fails, the same as when the strong cherry 1 is won, the middle white BAR will be out of the stop and the prize will be won. Was made to hold. In addition, even when the strong watermelon 3 is won, if the pressing operation of the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R fails, the cross black BAR singles will be the same as when the strong watermelon 2 is won. Also, the same as when the strong watermelon 1 was won, the prize was established at the stop roll that was out of the cross black BAR. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the omission from being missed when the push operation fails, and it is difficult to distinguish whether the winning result is the strong cherry 1 or the strong cherry 2. be able to. Therefore, the difficulty of the push operation and the game of discriminating the winning combination are balanced, and the interest is improved.

In the carry-over state, in addition to the winning flags corresponding to the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong watermelons 1 to 3, the bonus winning flags of the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are set. That is, the types of winning flags at the time of winning these specific roles differ depending on whether or not they are in the carry-over state, and the results that can be won in the game differ. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of stored data as compared with the configuration in which the winning mode is set for each state.

If a specific role is won during the carry-over state, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the third winning mode of the strong cherry or the third or fourth winning mode of the strong watermelon, if the push instruction lottery is won, A watermelon instruction notification effect corresponding to the winning result is performed. As a result, strong cherries and strong watermelons will not be missed when the stop operation is performed aiming at such a winning mode. Then, since the winning probability of this push instruction lottery is made different depending on the set value, it is possible to infer the set value by the occurrence of the push instruction notification effect.

In the case where a specific combination is won during the carry-over state, if the left reel 32L is stopped in a specific operation mode in which no omission occurs, the set value is not suggested. By doing so, a game is added in which the player selects which one to aim for and stops, depending on the balance between the risk of missing and the benefit of suggesting the set value. As a result, the games in the carry-over state can be diversified.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, it is possible to stop a stop roll different from the stop roll before the carry-over state based on winning the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong watermelons 1 to 3 during the carry-over state. It is configured to give a privilege different from the setting value suggestion by using. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing a winning point process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81. The winning point process is a process activated as one process in the other process (step S1711) in the effect setting process (FIG. 42).

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not the command at the time of all stop has been received. As the command at the time of all stop, the winning result command set in the reel control process (FIG. 18) of the main control device 101 is used. If the winning result command has not been received, the winning point processing is terminated as it is. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2902.

In step S2902, the winning result of this game is grasped. In the following step S2903, the content of the production executed in this game is grasped. For example, when the continuous production is executed, it is grasped whether or not it was the final game of the continuous production, and whether the continuous production ended with success or failure. In the following step S2904, a process of acquiring a point table that can be stored in various table storage areas 182a is executed.

An example of the point table is shown in FIG. 69 (b). In the point table, the result given is set to be different depending on the winning result and the content of the production. For example, if the "1st replay" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol are aligned and the replay prize is established, "1" points will be added, and the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol will be aligned. If a prize is won, "3" points will be added, and points are set according to the winning combination and the winning mode. In other words, if one of the "replay" symbols is not aligned and the replay prize is established, or if the "bell" symbol is not aligned and the bell prize is established, it is better than if these symbols are aligned and the prize is established. 0 points are given as few points (no points are given).

In this case, "15" points will be added if the "cherry" symbols are aligned and the cherry prize is established, while "40" points will be added if the "white BAR" symbols are aligned and the cherry prize is established. The points to be awarded are set to be different between the first winning mode (cherry matching) and the third winning mode (middle white BAR matching) at the time of winning a strong cherry. There is. In addition, "20" points will be added if the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and the watermelon prize is established, while "50" points will be added if the "black BAR" symbols are aligned and the watermelon prize is established. The points given in the first winning mode (upper watermelon matching) and the third and fourth winning modes (cross black BAR single matching, double matching) when a strong watermelon is won. Is set to be different. In addition, as a winning mode at the time of winning a strong watermelon, in the fourth winning mode of cross black BAR double matching, double points are given as in the third winning mode.

In the point table, points are set according to the content of the production in addition to the above-mentioned winning mode. For example, if the continuous production ends due to a failure, "10" points are set to be added.

In the point table, not only the information for adding points but also the information for subtracting points may be included. For example, if a strong cherry prize is established in the second winning mode (out of the middle white BAR) when the strong cherry is won, "5" points are deducted and the second winning mode (cross black BAR is out) when the watermelon is won. ) If a strong watermelon prize is established, "10" points may be deducted. Further, if the continuous production is completed successfully, "5" points may be subtracted. The values of these points to be added / subtracted are not limited to those described above, and the relationship of addition / subtraction may be reversed. For example, when the strong cherry is won, points are added when the strong cherry is won in the second winning mode, and points are subtracted when the strong cherry is won in the third winning mode. Alternatively, if the continuous production ends with a failure, points are subtracted, and if the continuous production ends with a success, points are added.

In step S2905, a process of calculating points to be added is performed based on the information grasped in steps S2902 and S2903 and the point table acquired in step S2904. Then, based on the calculation result, the point addition process is executed in step S2906. In the point addition process, a process of adding a value corresponding to the calculation result of step S2905 to the point counters set in the various counter areas 183b is performed. The value of the point counter is not reset by simply turning the power on / off, but is reset based on the RAM clear processing and the change / reset of the set value.

An example of an effect based on the addition of points by the point addition process will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stopped, the "white BAR" symbols stopped in the middle row, and the strong cherry winning was established in the third winning mode. In this case, in the point addition process, the addition process of "40" points is performed. As shown in FIG. 70A, the auxiliary display unit 65 is set with a bonus point display area BPE that displays a bonus point BP, which is the total number of points corresponding to the value of the point counter. The bonus point display area BPE is arranged in, for example, a corner of the auxiliary display unit 65, and is set in an area that does not overlap with the effect in each game such as continuous effect, particularly the push order notification effect. When "40" points are added to the bonus point BP based on the strong cherry winning as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the character image "+40" from the bottom where each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is arranged is a bonus. The effect of moving to the point display area BPE is performed.

In step S2907, it is determined whether or not the points are equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "200" points) to which the privilege is granted. If it is not more than the predetermined value, the point processing at the time of winning is terminated as it is. If it is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the privilege granting process is executed in step S2908, and the process of subtracting the points for the privilege granting (points for the predetermined value) from the point counter is executed in step S2909, and then at the time of winning. End point processing.

An example of an effect in which a privilege is given based on a point becoming a predetermined value or more will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the point becomes a predetermined value (200) or more, the bonus point BP of the bonus point display area BPE is blinking and displayed to notify that the point has reached the predetermined value or more. In addition, "Item Get" is displayed as a balloon display from the bonus point BP, and it is notified that an item can be acquired as a privilege based on the point becoming a predetermined value or more. As an item, for example, as a "golden hammer", a character image imitating a golden hammer is displayed together with the character display "Golden hammer is presented".

It is preferable that the item given here is used for the effect during the carry-over state. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the Dharma-dropping effect (FIG. 59) of the continuous effect is changed to the Dharma-dropping effect using the "golden hammer" so as to be performed. In this case, it is preferable to increase the possibility of continuing in each game of continuous production.

In addition, increasing the possibility of continuing in each game of continuous production does not make the final result of continuous production (whether it ends with success production or failure production) different, but ends with failure production. In some cases, it is intended to change the pattern that fails in the first game to a pattern that fails in the second game, which is more than that. Further, in the continuous production ending in the success production, the pattern that becomes the success production in the third game may be changed to the pattern that becomes the success production in the second game, which is less than that.

As described above, by utilizing the configuration in which the winning mode changes before and after the transition to the carry-over state, the winning mode appearing in the carry-over state is given more points than the winning mode appearing before the carry-over state. Therefore, when a strong cherry or the like is won during the carry-over state, the loss feeling that the transition lottery such as the attack mode or the additional lottery is not performed can be compensated by the above points.

In addition, since points are given not only in the carry-over state but also before the transition to the carry-over state, it is possible to associate the games before and after the transition to the carry-over state, and the games in the carry-over state can be associated. The interest is improved.

In particular, since the number of points given during the carry-over state is increased and the timing at which such points are used is set to the carry-over state, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the carry-over state through the change in the effect during the carry-over state. In this way, by increasing the significance of existence in the period from the setting of the bonus winning flag to the establishment of the bonus winning, the effect of continuous production that raises the expectation for the bonus winning is significantly improved. Then, by adopting such a configuration, the possibility of winning a specific combination during the carry-over state is high, and the effect of each invention relating to the processing at the time of winning the specific combination is also enhanced.

<Third embodiment>
In the first and second embodiments described above, the presence or absence of the deregulation of the right reel 32R at the time of winning the strong cherry or the strong watermelon is configured to be different depending on the winning combination, but the presence or absence of the deregulation is determined according to the set value. The configuration is different. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the stop information setting process in the present embodiment.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the strong cherries 1 and 2 have been won. When the strong cherries 1 and 2 are won, it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, that is, if the carry-over state is not set, the right reel restriction process is performed in step S3003. These processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and by performing the process of step S3003, the strong cherries 1 and 2 can be awarded in the first winning mode and the second winning mode. Therefore, it becomes impossible to win a prize in the third winning mode.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S3002 and it is determined that the carry-over state is in progress, the process of acquiring a release table according to the set value from various table storage areas 105a is performed in step S3004, and step S3005 is performed. The restriction release lottery process is performed at. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), in the release table, for example, when the strong cherries 1 and 2 are won in the carry-over state, the settings 1 to 3 are 50% likely to win the restriction release lottery and 50%. It is set to be non-winning with a probability of. In addition, settings 4 to 6 are set so that the limit release lottery is won with a 100% probability. In addition, the winning probability of the restriction release lottery may be different between the strong cherry 1 and the strong cherry 2.

In step S3006, it is determined whether or not the restriction release lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S3005. If not won, the right reel restriction process is performed in step S3003. In this case, even in the carry-over state, the strong cherries 1 and 2 can be won in the first winning mode and the second winning mode, and cannot be won in the third winning mode.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the limit release lottery has been won, the right reel first restriction release process is executed in step S3007. Such processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and by performing the processing of step S3006, the strong cherries 1 and 2 can be won in any of the first to third winning modes. That is, if the stop operation is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R aiming at the "white BAR" symbol, the strong cherry winning can be established in the third winning mode of the middle stage white BAR alignment.

If it is determined in step S3001 that the strong cherries 1 and 2 have not been won, the process proceeds to step S3008. In step S3008, it is determined whether or not the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are won. If the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are won, it is determined in step S3009 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If it is determined that the bonus winning flag is not set and the carry-over state is not in progress, the right reel restriction process is performed in step S3010. These processes are also the same as those in the first embodiment, and by performing the process of step S3010, the strong watermelon can win a prize in the first winning mode and the second winning mode, and the third and third. In the fourth winning mode, winning is not possible.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S3009 and it is determined that the carry-over state is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3011. In step S3011, a process of acquiring a release table according to a set value is performed from various table storage areas 105a, and a limit release lottery process is performed in step S3012. In the restriction release lottery in step S3012, whether or not to release the first restriction on the stop mode of the right reel is determined by lottery, and whether or not to release the second restriction is determined by lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73A, for example, when the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are won in the carry-over state, the setting 1 and 2 have a 100% probability of the restriction release lottery. It is stipulated that neither the first restriction release nor the second restriction release will be performed without winning. Further, the settings 3 to 5 are set so that the limit release lottery is not won with a 50% probability and the first restriction release is won with a 50% probability. The setting 6 is set so that the limit release lottery is not won with a 25% probability, the first restriction release is won with a 25% probability, and the second restriction release is won with a 50% probability. .. The winning probability of the restriction release lottery may be different between the strong watermelon 1, the strong watermelon 2, and the strong watermelon 3.

In step S3012, it is determined whether or not the restriction release lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S3012. If the limit release lottery has not been won, the right reel restriction process is performed in step S3010. In this case, even in the carry-over state, the strong watermelons 1 to 3 can win in the first winning mode and the second winning mode, and cannot win in the third and fourth winning modes. ..

If it is determined in step S3013 that the restriction release lottery has been won, it is determined in step S3014 whether or not the second restriction release has been won. If the second release lottery has not been won, that is, if the first release lottery has been won, the right reel first restriction release process is executed in step S3015. Such processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and by performing the processing of step S3015, the strong watermelons 1 to 3 can be awarded in the first to third winning modes, and the fourth winning is achieved. In the mode, you cannot win a prize. In other words, if you stop the reels 32L, 32M, 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, you will be able to win a strong watermelon prize in the third winning mode of cross black BAR singles. In the fourth winning mode of the black BAR double match, the strong watermelon winning will not be established.

If it is determined in step S3014 that the second release lottery has been won, the right reel second restriction release process is executed in step S3016. This process is also the same as that of the first embodiment, and by performing the process of step S3016, the strong watermelons 1 to 3 can be awarded in any of the first to fourth winning modes. That is, if the stop operation is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the strong watermelon winning can be established in the fourth winning mode of the cross black BAR double alignment.

After executing any of the processes of step S3003, step S3007, step S3010, step S3015 and step S3016, or when a negative determination is made in step S3008, the process of step S3017 is executed and then the stop information setting process is performed. finish. The process of step S3017 is the same as the process of step S2711.

By doing the above, it is possible to associate the winning mode at the time of winning a strong cherry or strong watermelon in the carry-over state with the set value, and it is possible to suggest the set value only by the winning mode (stop roll). It will be possible. For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the strong cherry in the carry-over state wins in the third winning mode, there is a 50% probability in relation to the release table in FIG. 73 (a). , It turns out that the setting is 4 or more (settings 4 to 6). In other words, when the strong cherry is won in the carry-over state, when the "white BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning is established in the second winning mode instead of the third winning mode. , It turns out that there is a 100% probability that the settings are 1 to 3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the strong watermelon in the carry-over state wins in the third winning mode, there is a 100% probability in relation to the release table in FIG. 73 (a). It turns out that the setting is 3 or more (settings 3 to 6). Further, when the strong watermelon in the carry-over state wins in the fourth winning mode, it is found that the setting 6 has a 100% probability in relation to the release table. In other words, when the strong watermelon in the carry-over state is won, when the "black BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning is established in the second winning mode instead of the third winning mode. Even so, it is not certain which of the settings 1 to 6.

In this way, since the stop control of the right reel 32R is configured to be different depending on the set value, it is right depending on the set value as in the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong watermelons 1 to 3 of the first and second embodiments. It is not necessary to set a plurality of results that make the stop control of the reel 32R different. That is, according to the above embodiment, any one of the strong cherries 1 and 2 may be set for the strong cherry, and any one of the strong watermelons 1 to 3 may be set for the strong watermelon. This makes it possible to enjoy the effect of changing the stop roll while simplifying the combination of roles.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the winning probabilities of strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3 are made different depending on the set value. FIG. 74 shows a lottery table for a normal gaming state in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, strong cherries 1 with IV = 13, strong cherries 2 with IV = 14, and strong cherries 3 with IV = 15 are set as strong cherries. Further, as the strong watermelon, a strong watermelon 1 with IV = 17, a strong watermelon 2 with IV = 18, a strong watermelon 3 with IV = 19, and a strong watermelon 4 with IV = 20 are set.

The strong cherries 1 and 2 of IV = 13, 14 have different winning probabilities depending on the set value, and are a role in which a transition lottery such as an attack mode can be performed, that is, a role that does not trigger the second advantageous state. On the other hand, the strong cherry 3 with IV = 15 has a common winning probability regardless of the set value, and is a role that can be a trigger event of the second advantageous state. Specifically, for the strong cherry 1 with IV = 13, the settings 1 to 3 are won with a probability of 1/1600, and the settings 4 to 6 are won with a probability of 1/1200. For the strong cherry 2 with IV = 14, the settings 1 to 3 are not won, and the settings 4 to 6 are won with a probability of 1/1200. Strong cherry 3 with IV = 15 wins with a probability of 1/600 common to all settings. That is, although the winning probability of the strong cherries 1 and 2 differs depending on the set value, any of the set values has a probability of winning one of the strong cherries 1 to 3 with a probability of 1/300.

The strong watermelons 1 to 3 having IV = 17 to 19 have different winning probabilities depending on the set value, and are roles that do not trigger the second advantageous state. On the other hand, the strong watermelon 4 with IV = 20 has a common winning probability regardless of the set value, and is a role that can be a trigger event of the second advantageous state. Specifically, for the strong watermelon 1 with IV = 17, settings 1 and 2 are won with a probability of 1/1600, settings 3 to 5 are won with a probability of 1/1200, and setting 6 is won with a probability of 2400 minutes. Win with a probability of 1. For the strong watermelon 2 with IV = 18, settings 1 and 2 are not won, settings 3 to 5 are won with a probability of 1/1200, and setting 6 is won with a probability of 1/2400. In the strong watermelon 3 with IV = 19, settings 1 to 5 are not won and only setting 6 is won, and the winning probability is 1/1200. The strong watermelon 4 with IV = 20 wins with a probability of 1/600 in all settings. That is, although the winning probability of the strong watermelons 1 to 3 differs depending on the set value, the winning probability of any of the strong watermelons 1 to 4 is 1/300 regardless of the set value.

Regarding the strong cherries 1 to 3 and the strong watermelons 1 to 4, as shown in FIG. 75, the strong cherries 1 to 3 are set so as to be able to win a role having a common winning mode, and the strong watermelons. 1 to 4 are also set so that it is possible to win a winning combination having a common winning mode. Specifically, the winning mode is common in that the 28th small winning combination can be won when the strong cherries 1 to 3 are won. In addition, when the strong watermelons 1 to 4 are won, the 30th small winning combination can be won, which is a common winning mode. In the figure, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role are omitted for the strong cherries 1 to 3, and the 41st small role is omitted for the strong watermelons 1 to 4.

As already explained, the 42nd small winning combination to the 44th small winning combination are control roles for distinguishing the winning results. Further, both the 45th small combination and the 46th small combination are provided as control combinations in the same manner as the 42nd small combination to the 44th small combination. Then, the "Youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, and the 45th small winning combination is established, and the left reel 32L The 45th small winning combination is established when the "Youth" symbol, the "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line.

The stop information setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the strong cherries 1 to 3 have been won. If any of the strong cherries 1 to 3 is won, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set and the carry-over state is not set, the right reel restriction process is executed in step S3103. Such processing is the same as that of the first to third embodiments, and by performing the processing of step S3103, the third winning mode of the strong cherry does not stop, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R Even if you aim at the "white BAR" pattern, a strong cherry prize will be established in a winning mode that is out of the middle white BAR.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S3102 and it is determined that the carry-over state is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the strong cherry won this time is the strong cherry 2. If it is a strong cherry 1 or a strong cherry 3 instead of the strong cherry 2, the process proceeds to step S3103, and the right reel restriction process is performed. That is, even if the strong cherry is won during the carry-over state, if the strong cherry 1 or the strong cherry 3 is used, even if the "white BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the middle stage A strong cherry prize will be established in a prize mode that is out of the white BAR.

If the strong cherry 2 is in step S3104, the right reel first restriction release process is executed in step S3105. Such processing is the same as that of the first to third embodiments, and by performing the right reel first restriction release processing, the "white BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the middle stage. It is possible to establish a strong cherry prize in a prize mode in which the white BARs are aligned.

If a negative determination is made in step S3101, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the strong watermelons 1 to 4 have been won. If the strong watermelons 1 to 4 are won, it is determined in step S3107 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set and the carry-over state is not set, the right reel restriction process is executed in step S3108. Such processing is the same as that of the first to third embodiments, and by performing the processing of step S3108, the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon are not stopped, and the reels 32L and 32M are not stopped. , Even if you aim at the "black BAR" symbol on 32R, the strong watermelon prize will be established in the winning mode where the cross black BAR is out of the way.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S3107 and it is determined that the carry-over state is set, the process proceeds to step S3109. In step S3109, it is determined whether or not the strong watermelon won this time is the strong watermelon 1 or the strong watermelon 4. If it is a strong watermelon 1 or a strong watermelon 4, the process proceeds to step S3108, and the right reel limiting process is performed. That is, even if the strong watermelon is won during the carry-over state, if the strong watermelon 1 or the strong watermelon 4 is used, the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon will not stop. Even if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the strong watermelon prize will be established in the winning mode where the cross black BAR is out of the way.

If it is determined in step S3109 that the strong watermelon won this time is strong watermelon 2 or strong watermelon 3, the process proceeds to step S3110. In step S3110, it is determined whether or not the watermelon is a strong watermelon 3. If the watermelon 2 is the strong watermelon 2 instead of the strong watermelon 3, the right reel first restriction release process is executed in step S3111. This process is the same as in the first to third embodiments, and by performing the right reel first restriction release process, the third winning mode of the strong watermelon can be stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, respectively. By aiming for the "black BAR" pattern on the 32R, a strong watermelon prize will be established in a winning mode in which the cross black BAR singles are aligned.

If it is determined in step S3110 that the watermelon is a strong watermelon 3, the right reel second restriction release process is executed in step S3112. This process is also the same as that of the first to third embodiments, and by performing the right reel second restriction release process, the fourth winning mode of the strong watermelon can be stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, respectively. By aiming at the "black BAR" pattern on the 32R, a strong watermelon prize will be established in a winning mode in which the cross black BAR doubles are aligned.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The winning probabilities of the winning combinations (strong cherries 1, 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3) whose stop rolls are changed during the carry-over state are different depending on the set value. As a result, it is possible to realize a game in which the set value is estimated based on the appearance rate of these winning combinations in the carry-over state.

By making the winning probabilities of strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3 different depending on the set values as described above, the strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3 are transferred to the attack mode and added by lottery. Although it does not trigger a lottery, the winning probability is the same as the corresponding strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3 as the strong cherry 3 and strong watermelon 4, and the winning probability does not differ depending on the set value. I set up a role. Therefore, by utilizing the commonality of the stop rolls with the winning combination whose winning probability does not differ depending on the set value, the winning combination on the side used for guessing the set value is also drawn to the attack mode or the like. It can be made to think that it is an opportunity for. Therefore, for the winning combination whose winning probability differs depending on these set values, it is possible to compensate for the feeling of loss due to winning during the carry-over state through the set value estimation.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first to fourth embodiments, the second and third winning modes of the strong cherry and the second to fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon are the left reel 32L regardless of the stop symbol of the right reel 32R. It is assumed that the winning is established by the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M, but this configuration is changed in this embodiment. FIG. 77 shows a symbol combination that is a winning mode of the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong watermelons 1 to 3 in the present embodiment.

If the strong cherries 1 and 2 are won in the present embodiment, it is possible to establish the 28th small winning combination prize and the 47th small winning combination winning. The 28th small winning mode is the winning mode of triple cherry, which is the first winning mode of the strong cherry in each of the above embodiments, and the middle stage, which is the second winning mode of the strong cherry in each of the above embodiments. The prize is established depending on the prize mode that is out of the white BAR. However, in the winning mode in which the middle white BAR is out of the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is defined. Specifically, the "black BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "white" of the middle reel 32M are defined. When the "BAR" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the strong cherry prize, which is the 28th small winning combination, is established. That is, in such a winning mode, when the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the effective line of the right reel 32R, even if the "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, the 28th Small role winning is not established.

In the strong cherries 1 and 2, the 47th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the middle white BAR is aligned, which is the third winning mode of the strong cherries in each of the above embodiments. However, in the winning mode in which the middle white BAR is aligned in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is defined. Specifically, the "black BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "white" of the middle reel 32M are defined. When the "BAR" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, a strong cherry prize, which is the 47th small winning combination, is established. That is, in such a winning mode, if the "red bell" symbol does not stop on the effective line of the right reel 32R, even if the "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, the first 47 small wins are not established.

Although not shown, the strong cherry 1 and the strong cherry 2 have, for example, the control combination 1 set as a duplicate combination in the strong cherry 2, so that the winning result can be distinguished.

In this embodiment, the symbol arrangement of the right reel 32R is different from each of the above embodiments. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), in the right reel 32R in the present embodiment, the “watermelon” symbol is arranged at the 16th position. In this case, in the case where the "white BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the time of winning the above strong cherries 1 and 2 in the 3-bet game, and the second winning mode (28th small winning combination winning) is obtained. A strong cherry prize is established in a winning mode in which the 16th "watermelon" symbol or the 19th "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower row and is out of the middle white BAR. On the other hand, in the 3-bet game, when the "white BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the time of winning the strong cherry 1 and 2, the third winning mode (47th small winning combination winning) is the 17th. The strong cherry prize is established in the winning mode in which the "red bell" symbol or the 20th "red bell" symbol is stopped at the lower row and the middle white BAR is aligned (particularly the 17th "red bell" symbol).

That is, in the present embodiment, although the symbols of the second winning mode and the third winning mode are set for the right reel 32R as the winning mode at the time of winning the strong cherry, the third winning mode at the time of winning the strong cherry is set. When the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the mode can be stopped, it is possible to establish a strong cherry prize in the second prize mode instead of the third prize mode, and the second prize mode can be established. When the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the winning mode can be stopped, the strong cherry winning can be established in the third winning mode instead of the second winning mode. The design arrangement of the right reel 32R is defined.

In addition, if the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are won in the present embodiment, it is possible to establish the 30th small role prize, the 41st small role prize, the 48th small role prize, and the 49th small role prize. The winning mode, which is the thirtieth small winning combination, is a winning mode in which the upper watermelons are aligned, which is the first winning mode of the strong watermelon in each of the above embodiments, and a cross, which is the second winning mode of the strong watermelon in each of the above embodiments. The prize is established depending on the prize mode that is out of the black BAR. However, in the winning mode in which the cross black BAR is out of the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is defined. Specifically, the "black BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "black" of the middle reel 32M are defined. When the "BAR" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the strong watermelon prize, which is the 30th small winning combination, is established. That is, in such a winning mode, if the "red bell" symbol does not stop on the effective line of the right reel 32R, even if the cross tempai of the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. , The 30th small winning combination is not established.

In the strong watermelons 1 to 3, the 48th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the cross black BAR singles, which is the third winning mode of the strong watermelons in each of the above embodiments, are aligned. However, in the winning mode in which the cross black BAR singles are aligned in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is defined, and specifically, the "black BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M are defined. When the "black BAR" symbol and the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the strong watermelon prize, which is the 48th small role prize, is established. That is, in such a winning mode, if the "white bell" symbol does not stop on the effective line of the right reel 32R, even if the cross tempai of the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. , The 48th small role prize is not established.

In the strong watermelons 1 to 3, the 49th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the cross black BAR double alignment, which is the fourth winning mode of the strong watermelon in each of the above embodiments, is achieved. However, in the winning mode in which the cross black BAR is double-aligned in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is defined, and specifically, the "black BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M are defined. When the "black BAR" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the strong watermelon prize, which is the 49th small winning combination, is established. That is, in such a winning mode, if the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the effective line of the right reel 32R, even if the cross tempai of the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. , The 49th small role prize is not established.

Although not shown, in the strong watermelon 1, the strong watermelon 2, and the strong watermelon 3, for example, the control combination 2 is set as an overlapping combination in the strong watermelon 2, and the control combination 3 is set in the strong watermelon 3. It is set as a duplicate combination, and it is possible to distinguish the winning results.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the right reel 32R in the present embodiment, the "red bell" symbol is arranged at the 6th and 10th positions, and the "white bell" symbol is arranged at the 5th position. In this case, in the case where the "black BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the time of winning the above strong watermelons 1 to 4 in the 3-bet game, and the second winning mode (30th small winning combination winning) is obtained. A strong watermelon prize is established in a winning mode in which the 6th "red bell" symbol or the 10th "red bell" symbol stops at the bottom and is out of the cross black BAR. On the other hand, in the 3-bet game, when the "black BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are won, the third winning mode (48th small winning combination) is the fifth. The strong watermelon prize is established in the prize mode in which the "white bell" symbol of No. 1 stops at the bottom and the cross black BAR is aligned.

Further, in the 3-bet game, when the "black BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the above strong watermelons 1 to 4 are won, and the fourth winning mode (49th small winning combination winning) is obtained, 7 A strong watermelon prize is established in a winning mode in which the 9th "black BAR" symbol or the 9th "black BAR" symbol stops at the bottom and becomes a cross black BAR double alignment.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the winning mode at the time of winning the strong watermelon, the symbols of the second winning mode, the third winning mode, and the fourth winning mode are set for the right reel 32R, but at the time of winning the strong watermelon. When the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the second winning mode can be stopped, a strong watermelon winning mode is awarded in the second winning mode instead of the third winning mode or the fourth winning mode. Even if the right reel 32R is stopped at the timing when the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode can be stopped, the strong watermelon prize can be won in the second winning mode. The symbol arrangement of the right reel 32R is defined so that it can be established. Further, when the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing when the third winning mode can be stopped, the strong watermelon winning mode is not the second winning mode or the fourth winning mode but the third winning mode. Is possible, and as described above, even if the right reel 32R is stopped at the timing when the third winning mode can be stopped, the strong watermelon winning is won in the second winning mode. The symbol arrangement of the right reel 32R is defined so that the above can be established. Then, when the right reel 32R is stopped so that the fourth winning mode can be stopped, the strong watermelon is not in the second winning mode or the third winning mode but in the fourth winning mode. It is possible to establish a prize, and as described above, even if the right reel 32R is stopped at the timing when the fourth prize mode can be stopped, the strong watermelon is used in the second prize mode. The design arrangement of the right reel 32R is defined so that the winning can be established.

The stop information setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79.

In step S3201, it is determined whether or not the strong cherries 1 and 2 have been won, and if the strong cherries 1 and 2 have been won, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the bonus winning flag has been set. If the bonus winning flag is not set and it is not in the carry-over state, the 28th small role prize out of the 28th small role prize and the 47th small role prize will be won as the winning mode of this strong cherry in step S3203. Is performed so that it is established with priority.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 28th small winning combination can be established and the 47th small winning combination cannot be established, the 28th small winning combination can be established. Stop drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when both the 28th small role winning and the 47th small winning combination can be established, the 28th small winning combination is established instead of the 47th small winning combination. Stop drive control is performed so as to cause. Then, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 47th small winning combination can be established and the 28th small winning combination cannot be established, the operation is stopped so as to establish the 47th small winning combination. Drive control is performed. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 47th small winning combination can be established, the 28th small winning combination can also be established. The sequence is defined. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3203, of the 28th small winning combination prize and the 47th small winning combination winning, the 28th small winning combination winning is established and the strong cherry winning is achieved. That is, among the first to third winning modes of the strong cherry, the strong cherry winning is established in the first and second winning modes, and the strong cherry winning is not established in the third winning mode.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S3202 and it is determined that the carry-over state is achieved, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not one strong cherry is won. If the strong cherry 1 is won, the process proceeds to step S3203 and the process of giving priority to the 28th small winning combination is executed. That is, in the strong cherry 1, even in the carry-over state, the strong cherry winning cannot be established in the third winning mode.

If it is determined in step S3204 that the strong cherry 2 is won instead of the strong cherry 1, in step S3205, the 47th of the 28th small role prize and the 47th small role winning is the winning mode of the strong cherry this time. Performs a process to give priority to winning a small role.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 47th small winning combination can be established and the 28th small winning combination cannot be established, the 47th small winning combination can be established. Stop drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when both the 28th small role winning and the 47th small winning combination can be established, the 47th small winning combination is established instead of the 28th small winning combination. Stop drive control is performed so as to cause. Then, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 28th small winning combination can be established and the 47th small winning combination cannot be established, the 28th small winning combination is stopped so as to be established. Drive control is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 28th small winning combination can be established, the symbol arrangement is arranged so that the 47th small winning combination can also be established. It has been decided. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3205, of the 28th small winning combination prize and the 47th small winning combination winning, the 47th small winning combination winning is established and the strong cherry winning is achieved. That is, among the first to third winning modes of the strong cherry, the strong cherry winning is established in the first and third winning modes, and the strong cherry winning is not established in the second winning mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not the strong watermelons 1 to 3 have been won. If the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are won, it is determined in step S3207 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set and it is not in the carry-over state, in step S3208, the winning mode of the strong watermelon this time is the 30th small winning combination, the 48th small winning combination, and the 49th small winning combination. Of these, a process is performed so that the 30th small winning combination is prioritized and established.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 30th small winning combination can be established and the 48th small winning combination cannot be established, the 30th small winning combination can be established. Stop drive control is performed. If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 30th small winning combination can be established and the 49th small winning combination cannot be established, the stop drive control is performed so as to establish the 30th small winning combination. Is done. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when all of the 30th small winning combination, the 48th small winning combination, and the 49th small winning combination can be established, the 48th small winning combination or the 49th small winning combination is performed. The stop drive control is performed so that the 30th small winning combination is established instead of the small winning combination. Then, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 48th small winning combination can be established and the 30th small winning combination cannot be established, the stop operation is performed so as to establish the 48th small winning combination. Drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 49th small winning combination can be established and the 30th small winning combination cannot be established, the 49th small winning combination is stopped so as to be established. Drive control is performed. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 48th small winning combination can be established, the 30th small winning combination can also be established. The sequence is defined. Further, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 49th small winning combination can be established, the symbol arrangement is defined so that the 30th small winning combination can also be established. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3208, among the 30th small winning combination, the 48th small winning combination, and the 49th small winning combination, the 30th small winning combination is established and the strong watermelon winning is achieved. .. That is, among the first to fourth winning modes of strong watermelon, the strong watermelon winning is established in the first and second winning modes, and the strong watermelon winning is not established in the third and fourth winning modes. Become.

If it is determined in step S3207 that the watermelon is in the carry-over state, it is determined in step S3209 whether or not the strong watermelon 1 has been won. If the strong watermelon 1 is won, the process proceeds to step S3208 and the process of giving priority to the 30th small winning combination is executed. That is, in the strong watermelon 1, even in the carry-over state, the strong watermelon winning cannot be established in the third and fourth winning modes.

When it is determined in step S3209 that the watermelon is not the strong watermelon 1, it is determined in the step S3210 whether or not the watermelon is the strong watermelon 3. If it is determined that the watermelon is not the strong watermelon 3 but the strong watermelon 2, in step S3211, the winning mode of the strong watermelon this time is the 30th small winning combination, the 48th small winning combination, and the 49th small winning combination. , The 48th small winning combination is given priority, then the 30th small winning combination is given priority, and then the 49th small winning combination is established.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 48th small winning combination can be established and the 30th small winning combination cannot be established, the 48th small winning combination can be established. Stop drive control is performed. If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 48th small winning combination can be established and the 49th small winning combination cannot be established, the stop drive control is performed so as to establish the 48th small winning combination. Is done. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when all of the 30th small winning combination prize, the 48th small winning combination winning, and the 49th small winning combination winning can be established, the 30th small winning combination winning or the 49th small winning combination winning is performed. The stop drive control is performed so that the 48th small winning combination is established instead of the small winning combination. Then, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 30th small winning combination can be established and the 48th small winning combination cannot be established, the process is stopped so as to establish the 30th small winning combination. Drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 30th small winning combination can be established and the 49th small winning combination cannot be established, the 30th small winning combination is stopped so as to be established. Drive control is performed. Further, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 30th small winning combination can be established and the 48th small winning combination or the 49th small winning combination cannot be established, the 30th small winning combination is won. The stop drive control is performed so as to establish. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 48th small winning combination can be established, the symbol arrangement is arranged so that the 30th small winning combination can also be established. It has been decided. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3211, the 48th small role prize is established among the 30th small role prize, the 48th small role prize, and the 49th small role prize, and the strong watermelon prize is obtained, and the 48th small role is obtained. If the winning combination cannot be established, the 30th small winning combination will be established and the strong watermelon will be awarded. In other words, even if the stop operation is performed at the timing of the 49th small role prize, the 48th small role prize or the 30th small role prize is established instead of the 49th small role prize, and the strong watermelon prize is obtained. .. That is, among the first to fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon, the strong watermelon winning is established in the first to third winning modes, and the strong watermelon winning is not established in the fourth winning mode.

If it is determined in step S3210 that the strong watermelon 3 has been won, in step S3212, the winning mode of the strong watermelon this time is the 30th small winning combination, the 48th small winning combination, and the 49th small winning combination. , The 49th small winning combination is given priority, then the 48th small winning combination is given priority, and then the 30th small winning combination is established.

In this case, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 49th small winning combination can be established and the 48th small winning combination cannot be established, the 49th small winning combination can be established. Stop drive control is performed. If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 49th small winning combination can be established and the 30th small winning combination cannot be established, the stop drive control is performed so as to establish the 49th small winning combination. Is done. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when all of the 30th small winning combination, the 48th small winning combination, and the 49th small winning combination can be established, the 30th small winning combination or the 48th small winning combination is performed. The stop drive control is performed so that the 49th small winning combination is established instead of the small winning combination. Then, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 48th small winning combination can be established and the 49th small winning combination cannot be established, the 48th small winning combination is stopped so as to be established. Drive control is performed. In addition, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the 48th small winning combination can be established and the 30th small winning combination cannot be established, the 48th small winning combination is stopped so as to be established. Drive control is performed. Further, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 48th small winning combination can be established and the 30th small winning combination or the 49th small winning combination cannot be established, the 48th small winning combination is won. The stop drive control is performed so as to establish. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the 49th small winning combination can be established, the 30th small winning combination can also be established, and the 48th small winning combination can be established. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the winning combination can be established, the symbol arrangement is defined so that the 30th small winning combination can also be established. Therefore, by performing the process of step S3212, the 49th small role prize is established among the 30th small role prize, the 48th small role prize, and the 49th small role prize, and the strong watermelon prize is obtained, and the 49th small role is awarded. If the role prize cannot be established, the 48th small role prize will be established and the strong watermelon prize will be awarded, and if the 48th small role prize cannot be established, the 30th small role prize will be established and the strong watermelon prize will be awarded. Will be. In other words, if the stop operation is performed at the timing of the 49th small winning combination, the 49th small winning combination will be established, and if the stopping operation is performed at a timing other than that timing, another small winning combination will be established. .. That is, among the first to fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon, the strong watermelon winning mode is established in any of the first to fourth winning modes.

By doing so, even if the winning symbol combination is a game result in which the right reel 32R is also set, the winning mode can be different depending on the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag. That is, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, it is possible to prevent the third winning mode of the strong cherry and the third and fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon from stopping depending on the timing of the stop operation. .. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rarity of stopping the middle white BAR alignment and the cross black BAR single alignment / double alignment, and to secure the event that the transition to attack mode etc. or the additional lottery is not performed. It will be possible. Therefore, the significance of being a substitute for not performing these transition lottery and additional lottery is maintained.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, it is referred to as a carry-over state in which the first BB winning flag is set (hereinafter referred to as "first carry-over state") and a carry-over state in which the second BB winning flag is set (hereinafter referred to as "second carry-over state"). ), The winning modes of the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are different. FIG. 80 shows an outline of changes in the winning modes of the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong watermelons 1 to 3 in the present embodiment.

In the strong cherry 1 in the present embodiment, in the situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode, the triple cherry, and the second winning mode, the middle white BAR, are stopped. Although it is possible, the middle white BAR alignment, which is the third winning mode, cannot be stopped. On the other hand, in the first carry-over state in which the first BB winning flag is set, any of the first winning mode to the third winning mode can be stopped, and in the second carry-over state in which the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode to the third winning mode can be stopped. The first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, but the third winning mode cannot be stopped.

In the strong cherry 2 in the present embodiment, in the situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, but the third winning mode is possible. The mode is non-stoptable. On the other hand, in the first carry-over state or the second carry-over state, any of the first winning mode to the third winning mode can be stopped.

That is, when any of the bonus winning flags is set, if the strong cherry 1 or the strong cherry 2 is won, and the middle white BAR alignment is stopped, the strong cherry 1 is won and the first BB is won, or It will be a strong cherry 2 win. In other words, if the middle white BAR alignment does not stop and the middle white BAR deviation stops, it is confirmed that the strong cherry 1 and the second BB have been won.

Since the winning probability of Strong Cherry 1 is set so that it is more difficult to win in settings 4 to 6 than in settings 1 to 3, in the carry-over state of any of the bonuses, "white BAR" is applied to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Although we aimed at the design, if a strong cherry prize is established outside the middle white BAR, there is a high possibility that the settings are 1 to 3. On the other hand, in the second carry-over state in which the second BB winning flag is set, it is the strong cherry 2 that the middle white BAR alignment stops, and the strong cherry 2 is not won in the settings 1 to 3, so either In the carry-over state of the bonus, if a strong cherry prize is established in the middle white BAR lineup aiming at the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and then the second BB prize is established, setting 4 It is determined that the above is the case.

Further, in the strong watermelon 1 in the present embodiment, in the situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the upper watermelon which is the first winning mode and the cross black BAR which is the second winning mode are out of the way. Although it can be stopped, the cross black BAR single set and the cross black BAR double set, which are the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode, cannot be stopped. For the strong watermelon 1, regardless of whether it is in the carry-over state or not, a prize is established even if the watermelon is missed. The same applies to the strong watermelons 2 and 3 as the watermelon missed eyes. On the other hand, in the strong watermelon 1, the winning mode does not change in either the first carry-over state or the second carry-over state, and the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, and the third The winning mode and the fourth winning mode cannot be stopped.

In the strong watermelon 2, in the situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, but the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode can be stopped. The winning mode is non-stoptable. In the first carry-over state, the winning mode does not change, the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, and the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode cannot be stopped. On the other hand, in the second carry-over state, any of the first winning mode to the fourth winning mode can be stopped.

In the strong watermelon 3, in the situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the first winning mode and the second winning mode can be stopped, but the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode can be stopped. The winning mode is non-stoptable. In the first carry-over state, any of the first winning mode to the fourth winning mode can be stopped, and in the second carry-over state, the first winning mode to the third winning mode can be stopped, and the fourth The winning mode is non-stoptable.

That is, when the cross black BAR double alignment is stopped, it is determined that the strong watermelon 2 is won and the 2nd BB is won, or the strong watermelon 3 is won and the 1st BB is won.

In the 1st carry-over state where the 1st BB winning flag is set, it is the strong watermelon 3 that the cross black BAR double alignment stops, and the strong watermelon 3 wins only the setting 6, so either bonus In the carry-over state, aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, if a strong watermelon prize is established with a cross black BAR double lineup, and then the first BB prize is established, it is set to 6. Determine. Further, in the second carry-over state in which the second BB winning flag is set, it is the strong watermelon 2 that the cross black BAR double alignment stops, and the strong watermelon 2 cannot be won in the settings 1 and 2, and the setting 3 Since the winning probability is set so that ~ 5 is easier to win than setting 6, in the carry-over state of any of the bonuses, aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, cross black If a strong watermelon prize is established with a BAR double match and then a second BB prize is established, it is confirmed that the setting is 3 or higher, and it is more likely that the setting is 3 to 5 than the possibility of setting 6. Become.

In the bonus winning notification in the present embodiment, the type of the winning bonus (first BB or second BB) is notified. Therefore, after the notification of whether the first BB has been won or the second BB has been won in the bonus winning notification, the specific winning combination in the carry-over state will occur. Then, when a specific combination is won during the carry-over state, as in the first embodiment, the notification that the strong cherry has been won or the notification that the strong watermelon has been won is the white BAR eye. It is performed by a push instruction notification effect, a black BAR push instruction notification effect, and the like. By doing so, as a player, for example, when it is notified that the strong cherry has been won in the situation where it has been notified that the second BB has been won, the middle white BAR will be aligned ( The stop operation is performed while hoping that the strength is 2), that is, the setting is 4 or higher. In addition, when it is notified that the strong watermelon has been won in the situation where it has been notified that the first BB has been won, the cross black BAR doubles will be aligned (strong watermelon 3), that is, the setting. Perform the stop operation hoping that it is 6. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the degree of attention to the stop result by performing the stop operation while narrowing down the set value before the stop, not after the stop.

In addition, it is possible to relate not only the winning mode to stop but also the type of winning bonus to the setting value suggestion, and we are interested not only in the stop roll during the carry-over state but also in the type of bonus to be transferred after that. It can be brought closer.

As described above, in the configuration in which the winning modes of the specific winning combinations in the carry-over state of the first BB and the second BB are different, the winning probabilities of the first BB and the second BB may be different. In this case, as described above, it is confirmed that the strong cherry 2 and the middle white BAR are set to 4 or more when the 2nd BB is won, or the strong watermelon 3 and the cross black BAR are set to 6 when the 1st BB is won. It is good to set each BB winning probability in relation to the appearance frequency of the setting value suggestion and the ease of narrowing down. For example, from the viewpoint of ease of narrowing down, the setting value suggestion of setting 6 is easier to narrow down than the setting value suggestion of setting 4 or more, so the second BB is won rather than the first BB. It may be an easy configuration.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode of suggesting the set value is different from that of the first to fifth embodiments. FIG. 81 shows an outline of the symbol combination and the winning probability, which are the winning modes of the strong watermelons 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the winning mode of the strong cherry does not change before and after the transition to the carry-over state.

If the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are won in the present embodiment, it is possible to establish the 30th small winning combination prize and the 48th small winning combination winning. The 30th small winning combination is the same as in each of the above embodiments, and the winning mode is set so that the strong watermelon winning mode can be established in the first to fourth winning modes of the strong watermelon. Of these, the 30th small winning combination of strong watermelon 1 and strong watermelon 2 does not change the winning mode before and after the transition to the carry-over state (the restriction on the right reel 32R is not lifted), and even if it is won during the carry-over state. It is possible to establish a strong watermelon prize in the first prize mode or the second prize mode, and it is not possible to establish a strong watermelon prize in the third and fourth prize modes. In addition, the winning mode of the 30th small winning combination of the strong watermelon 3 changes before and after the transition to the carry-over state, and before the transition to the carry-over state, the strong watermelon winning is established in the first and second winning modes. On the other hand, in the third and fourth winning modes, the strong watermelon winning cannot be established. Then, in the 30th small winning combination of the strong watermelon 3, it is possible to establish the strong watermelon winning in the first to fourth winning modes during the carry-over state.

The 50th small winning combination prize is set to a first winning mode (upper watermelon matching) of the above-mentioned strong watermelon, a winning mode that is out of the middle white BAR, and a winning mode that the middle white BAR is aligned. These winning modes that are out of the middle white BAR correspond to the second winning mode of the strong cherry shown in each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, as the winning mode of the strong watermelon, the deviation from the middle white BAR is also referred to as the fifth winning mode of the strong watermelon. In addition, the winning mode in which the middle white BARs are aligned corresponds to the third winning mode of the strong cherry shown in each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, the middle white BAR alignment as the winning mode of the strong watermelon is also referred to as the sixth winning mode of the strong watermelon. In addition, also in this embodiment, the middle white BAR deviation and the middle white BAR alignment in the 50th small winning combination winning are won by the stop symbols of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M as in the first to fourth embodiments. Is established, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R does not affect the winning determination.

Of these, the 50th small winning combination of Strong Watermelon 1 does not change the winning mode before and after the transition to the carry-over state (the restriction on the right reel 32R is not lifted), and even if it is won during the carry-over state, the first prize is won. It is possible to establish a strong watermelon prize in the mode or the fifth winning mode, and it is not possible to establish a strong watermelon winning in the sixth winning mode. In addition, the winning mode of the 50th small winning combination of the strong watermelon 2 and the strong watermelon 3 changes before and after the transition of the carry-over state, and before the transition of the carry-over state, both are strong in the first and fifth winning modes. While it is possible to establish a watermelon prize, it is not possible to establish a strong watermelon prize in the sixth winning mode. Then, the 50th small winning combination of the strong watermelon 2 and the strong watermelon 3 can establish the strong watermelon winning in the first, fifth, and sixth winning modes in the carry-over state.

As for the winning probability of each strong watermelon, the strong watermelon 1 is won with a probability of 1/600 in the settings 1 to 3, the settings 4 and 5 are won with a probability of 1/1200, and the setting 6 is a winning probability of 2400 minutes. Win with a probability of 1. The strong watermelon 2 is not won in the settings 1 to 3, and the settings 4 to 6 are won with a probability of 1/1200. The strong watermelon 3 does not win the settings 1 to 5, and the setting 6 wins with a probability of 1/2400. That is, although the winning probabilities of the strong watermelons 1 to 3 differ depending on the set value, they are common in that they win any of the strong watermelons 1 to 3 with a probability of 1/600.

Although not shown, in this embodiment as well, control combinations for distinguishing the winning results of the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are set.

In this case, before the transition to the carry-over state, regardless of which of the strong watermelons 1 to 3, the first winning mode of the strong watermelon (upper watermelon alignment), the second winning mode (cross black BAR off), and the second Since the winning is established in the winning mode of 5 (out of the middle white BAR), it is not possible to determine which of the strong watermelons 1 to 3 having different winning probabilities has been won. On the other hand, after the transition to the carry-over state, the winning mode does not change for the strong watermelon 1, but the winning mode changes for the strong watermelon 2 and the strong watermelon 3. That is, in the case of the strong watermelon 2, in addition to the first winning mode, the second winning mode, and the fifth winning mode, it is possible to establish the winning in the sixth winning mode (middle white BAR alignment). Will be. Further, in the case of the strong watermelon 3, in addition to the first winning mode, the second winning mode, and the fifth winning mode, the third winning mode (cross black BAR singles) and the fourth winning mode (cross black BAR singles) It is possible to establish a prize by the cross black BAR double alignment) and the sixth winning mode (middle white BAR alignment).

As mentioned above, the strong watermelon 2 is not won in the settings 1 to 3. Therefore, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or more when the strong watermelon winning is established in the sixth winning mode (middle white BAR alignment) in the carry-over state. In addition, the strong watermelon 3 is not won in the settings 1 to 5. Therefore, it is confirmed that the setting 6 is established when the strong watermelon winning is established in the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode in the carry-over state.

The sixth winning mode of the strong watermelon may be stopped when the strong watermelon 2 or the strong watermelon 3 is won in the carry-over state. On the other hand, the third winning mode and the fourth winning mode of the strong watermelon may be stopped when the strong watermelon 3 is won in the carry-over state. Therefore, for example, in the case of setting 6, the strong watermelon winning is established in the sixth winning mode with a probability of 1/2 of the winning of the strong watermelons 1 to 3 (probability of 1/1200 of each game). It is possible to establish a strong watermelon prize in the 3rd and 4th winning modes with a 1/4 probability (1/4 probability of each game) when the strong watermelons 1 to 3 are won. Become. That is, when the setting 6 is set as the set value, the setting value suggestion (sixth winning mode) of the setting 4 or higher appears more than the setting value suggestion of the setting 6 (third and fourth winning modes). It's getting easier.

The design arrangement is determined so that the third and fourth winning modes in which the cross black BAR singles / doubles are aligned and the sixth winning mode in which the middle white BARs are aligned can be missed. ing. That is, the setting value suggestion of the setting 4 or higher and the setting value suggestion of the setting 6 do not appear at the same time, and when one is tried to appear, the other cannot appear. In this way, it is possible to play a game in which the player selects in advance a set value suggestion that is different in the degree to which the set value can be narrowed down, and then causes the set value suggestion to appear at a stop. The fun of the game that lets you narrow down the number of games is greatly improved.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, even if a specific winning combination that triggers a transition lottery such as an attack mode or an additional lottery is won, another small winning combination is established. The winning mode is defined. FIG. 82 shows an outline of a winning mode of a weak cherry, a strong cherry, a weak watermelon, and a strong watermelon as a specific role that triggers a transition lottery such as an attack mode or an additional lottery in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the first CB to the fourth CB are set as the state transition prizes for transitioning to the CB state. The first CB is a role in which the winning determination is performed only by the stop symbol of the left reel 32L, and the winning mode corresponding to the 27th small winning combination in each of the above embodiments and the winning mode as a substitute symbol at the time of dropping are set. ing. That is, the first CB prize is established when either the "cherry" symbol, the "first replay" symbol, or the "second replay" symbol of the left reel 32L stops on the effective line.

In the second CB, a winning mode corresponding to the 28th small winning combination in each of the above embodiments and a winning mode as a substitute symbol at the time of omission are set. That is, the left reel 32L "cherry" symbol, "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M "red bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "cherry" symbol, and the right reel. The second CB prize is established when the 32R "cherry" symbol, the "first replay" symbol, or the "second replay" symbol stops on the effective line.

The third CB is set with a winning mode corresponding to the 29th small winning combination and the 41st small winning combination in each of the above embodiments, and a winning mode as a substitute symbol at the time of dropping. That is, the "watermelon" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stopped on the effective line. In some cases, the "watermelon" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "cherry" or "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. If you do, the 3rd CB prize will be established.

The fourth CB is set with a winning mode corresponding to the 30th small winning combination and the 41st small winning combination in each of the above embodiments, and a winning mode as a substitute symbol at the time of dropping. That is, the "watermelon" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When stopped, the "watermelon" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "cherry" or "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. The 4th CB prize is established when the game is stopped at.

When these 1st CB to 4th CB prizes are established, the game shifts to the CB state in which the maximum number of payouts is 5 cards. In the present embodiment, the number of payouts for each small winning combination in the 2-bet game is 5, and in the CB state based on the 1st CB to 4th CB winnings, 5 medals can be obtained in any CB state. It will be possible.

The weak cherry, the strong cherry, the weak watermelon, and the strong watermelon in the present embodiment are set as an overlapping combination of the CB of any of the first CB to the fourth CB and the second small combination to the 26th small combination. The second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination are the same as in each of the above embodiments, and all of them are set with a winning mode in which the upper bells are aligned, and three cards are paid out. More specifically, the weak cherry is the overlapping role of the 1st CB and the 2nd small role to the 26th small role, the strong cherry is the overlapping role of the 2nd CB and the 2nd small role to the 26th small role, and the weak watermelon is the 1st. The 3CB and the second small role to the 26th small role are duplicated roles, and the strong watermelon is the duplicated role of the 4CB and the second small role to the 26th small role.

When the 1st CB to the 4th CB prizes are established in the 3-bet game, the game shifts to the CB state in which 5 cards are paid out in the 2-bet game, although the payout does not occur in the game at the time of the prize. That is, when the 1st CB to the 4th CB prizes are established, it is possible to receive 3 payouts including the CB state (0 deduction). In addition, in the 3-bet game, if the 2nd to 26th small winning combination is established, it is possible to receive 3 payouts (0 deduction). That is, the privilege obtained by the player is set to be the same when the first CB to the fourth CB prize is established and when the second small combination to the 26th small combination prize is established.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when these weak cherries, strong cherries, weak watermelons, and strong watermelons are won, a lottery for shifting to an attack mode or the like or an additional lottery is performed. The winning probability and the like are arbitrary, but for example, each winning probability of the first embodiment can be diverted. And, in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, that is, in the carry-over state, these transition lottery and additional lottery are not performed (the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing are not executed) as described above. That's right.

As already explained, the first advantageous state as a bonus state that becomes advantageous for the player by changing the probability (lottery table) of the winning or losing lottery of the small winning combination is a plurality of bonus states (first advantageous state). It is set so that it does not occur in duplicate. That is, in the situation where the transition to the bonus state based on the first BB or the second BB winning is confirmed and the bonus winning flag is set, the first BB, the second BB, and the CB are set not to be won. For example, in the carry-over state, when the bonus duplicate winning combination of IV = 35 to 48 in FIG. 17 is won, the small winning combination winning flag such as strong cherry or strong watermelon is set, but the corresponding bonus winning flag is not set. ..

When the bonus winning flag is set also for the overlapping role (weak cherry, strong cherry, weak watermelon, strong watermelon) with each CB that triggers the transition lottery such as the attack mode and the additional lottery in this embodiment. Is set so that the event that each CB is elected in duplicate does not occur. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set and the overlapping combination with each of these CBs is won, each CB winning flag is not set, and the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination winning flag are set. The flag. As a result, with respect to the overlapping roles with each of these CBs, the winning combination composition will differ depending on whether or not it is in the carry-over state.

Weak cherries, which are duplicates of the 1st CB and the 2nd to 26th small roles, can win prizes for both the 1st CB and the 2nd to 26th small roles before the transition to the carry-over state. be. However, in the priority setting process of step S315 in the present embodiment, the CB winning is set to be established in preference to the small winning combination winning. Therefore, if the weak cherry is won before the carry-over state, the first CB prize will be established. On the other hand, after the transition to the carry-over state, if the weak cherry is won, the 1st CB winning flag is not set among the 1st CB and the 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination, and the 2nd small winning combination to the 2nd small winning combination are not set. The 26 small winning combination flag is set. As a result, if the weak cherry is won during the carry-over state, the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination will be established.

Similarly, the strong cherry, which is an overlapping role of the 2nd CB and the 2nd small role to the 26th small role, wins a prize for both the 2nd CB and the 2nd small role to the 26th small role before the transition to the carry-over state. Is possible. However, in the priority setting process of step S315 in the present embodiment, the CB winning is set to be established in preference to the small winning combination winning. Therefore, if the strong cherry is won before the carry-over state, the second CB prize will be established. On the other hand, after the transition to the carry-over state, if the strong cherry is won, the 2nd CB winning flag is not set among the 2nd CB and the 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination, and the 2nd small winning combination to the 2nd small winning combination are not set. 26 Small winning combination winning flag is set. As a result, if the strong cherry is won during the carry-over state, the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination will be established.

The same applies to the weak watermelon, which is an overlapping role of the 3rd CB and the 2nd to 26th small roles, and the strong watermelon, which is the overlapping role of the 4th CB and the 2nd small role to the 26th small role. In the front, when the weak watermelon is won, the 3rd CB prize is established, and when the strong watermelon is won, the 4th CB prize is established. Then, in the carry-over state, when the weak watermelon is won and when the strong watermelon is won, the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination are established.

As described above, in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, it is possible to use the event that the new bonus winning flag (CB winning flag) is not set to make the winning combination in the carry-over state different. It will be possible.

Specifically, while allowing the winning of the overlapping combination (specific combination) with each CB in the situation where the bonus winning flag is set, if the overlapping combination is won in the situation, the CB winning flag is set. Do not set, but set the 2nd to 26th small winning combination flags. Then, in this situation, even if the duplicate winning combination is won, the CB winning is not generated, and only the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination are generated.

In other words, if the bonus winning flag is not set and the duplicate winning combination is the trigger for the transition lottery to the attack mode or the additional lottery, the CB winning flag and the 2nd to 26th small winning combination are won. If a duplicate winning combination is won in a situation where the flag is set and any winning is possible, but the bonus winning flag is set, only the 2nd to 26th small winning combination flags are set. Is set, so that only the winning of the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination can be established. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the bonus winning flag, it is possible to make the winning result different when the duplicate winning combination is won.

In particular, if duplicate winnings are won in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, the CB winning will be given priority among the CB winning and the 2nd to 26th small winnings. Therefore, if the duplicate winning combination is won in such a situation, the CB prize will be established. By doing so, if the bonus winning flag is not set, the CB winning is established, and if the bonus winning flag is set, the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination can be established. It is possible to win a prize as a result of each.

The winning mode for each CB winning is set corresponding to the winning mode in which the weak cherry, the strong cherry, the weak watermelon, and the strong watermelon are awarded in each of the above embodiments. That is, when the first CB prize is established, the same stop result as when the weak cherry prize is established in each of the above embodiments, and when the second CB prize is established, the strong cherry prize in each of the above embodiments is established. If the stop roll is the same as when it is established and the 3rd CB prize is established, the stop roll is the same as when the weak watermelon prize is established in each of the above embodiments, and when the 4 CB prize is established. The result is the same as when the strong watermelon prize in each of the above embodiments is established. These winning modes are the same as the winning modes that overlap with the bonus (weak cherry duplication 1, 2, etc.), and it is possible to fuel expectations for bonuses, attack modes, etc. through the winning modes. ing.

Then, if a specific winning combination that is an overlapping combination with each of these CBs is won in a situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, the CB winning is established in the above-mentioned winning mode such as cherry. On the other hand, if the specific winning combination is won in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, the second small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination are established as described above, and the winning mode is the same as the upper bell, which is usually the case. It is a stop roll that sometimes appears frequently. By doing so, in the situation where the bonus winning flag is not set, the bonus winning flag is set while giving a sense of expectation to the lottery to shift to the attack mode depending on the winning mode of the specific winning combination. In the situation, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that a specific role has been won by aligning the upper bells. By doing so, in a situation where the bonus winning flag is set, a sense of loss is given that the transition lottery is not performed even though the transition lottery to the attack mode etc. is won. It can be made difficult.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the carry-over state is carried over to a specific role that triggers a lottery for transition to an attack mode or the like, or a role that has a commonality with a specific role that triggers a non-triggered one. If the player wins the prize, the winning mode changes compared to before the transition to the carry-over state, but the winning combination is not limited to these roles and may be another role. , May be configured to include other roles. For example, as other roles, the push order bell as the push order role and the push order replay may have different winning modes depending on before and after the transition to the carry-over state, or the winning mode of other payout small roles such as the common bell may be used. It may be configured to be different.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the execution of the process related to the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like or the additional lottery (process related to the instruction function or the process related to the transition lottery to the advantageous section) is restricted, and the first BB or the second BB is restricted. Although the carry-over state has been described as an example, it is not limited to the carry-over state as long as the processing related to the instruction function and the execution of the transition lottery to the advantageous section are restricted. For example, a situation in which the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted may be set as a bonus state, or may be a bonus winning game.

(3) Regarding the bonuses of the first BB and the second BB, the winning probability differs depending on the set value, but a bonus may be provided in which the winning probability does not differ depending on the set value. In this case, a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like or an additional lottery may be performed during the bonus in which the winning probability does not differ depending on the set value. That is, there may be a case where a transition lottery to the attack mode or the like or an additional lottery is performed by winning a specific combination in the bonus, or a case where the lottery is not performed. As an opportunity for such a transition lottery during the bonus, for example, the case where the 39th small winning combination prize in the bonus is established or the case where the 40th small winning combination winning is established can be considered. Then, the winning mode of the 39th small winning combination or the 40th small winning combination may be different depending on whether or not the transition lottery or the like is carried out.

(4) The setting value suggestion is the winning probability of the push instruction lottery (occurrence rate of the push instruction notification effect), the appearance rate of the third winning mode when the strong cherry is won, and the third and third when the strong watermelon is won. Although the configuration is based on the appearance rate of the winning mode of 4, the mode of suggesting the set value is not limited to the above, and may be another mode. For example, it may be configured to suggest the set value by differently changing the effect mode (display content, type of sound effect, etc.) of the eye-pressing instruction effect, or the sound effect at the time of winning a strong cherry or a strong watermelon, the effect at the time of winning, etc. It may be configured to suggest a set value according to the occurrence rate and mode of.

Further, a freeze lottery may be performed when a strong cherry is won or a strong watermelon is won, and a set value may be suggested depending on the winning probability of the freeze lottery and the type and mode of the freeze to be generated. For example, when the strong cherry is won, the winning information is stored as a game after the predetermined game until the next game, and each reel 32L has a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%) when the start lever 41 of the next game is operated. , 32M, 32R are rotated in the reverse direction at a low speed to generate a freeze effect. Then, it is a suggestion of the set value that a roll that is aligned with the middle white BAR appears during the freeze effect, and is, for example, a suggestion of the set value that suggests that the setting is 4 or more. Regardless of the setting, after the freeze effect is generated with the above-mentioned predetermined probability, the probability that a roll with the middle white BAR will appear during the freeze effect differs depending on the set value (middle white with setting 4 or higher). It may be configured such as (a roll that becomes a BAR match appears and does not appear if the setting is 3 or less), or if a freeze effect occurs when a strong cherry (strong cherry 2) is won, the middle white BAR match is uniformly obtained. In addition to the configuration in which the outcome appears, the winning probability of the strong cherry accompanied by the freeze effect and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect are different depending on the set value (freeze effect is generated at setting 4 or more, and freeze effect is generated at setting 3 or less). It may be a configuration such as (does not generate), or a configuration in which these are combined to suggest a set value.

Further, when the strong watermelon is won, the winning information is stored as a game after the predetermined game until the next game, and each reel 32L, with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%) when the start lever 41 of the next game is operated, A freeze effect is generated by rotating the 32M and 32R in the reverse direction at a low speed. Then, during the freeze effect, the appearance of a cross black BAR single-matched roll is used as a suggestion of the set value, and for example, a set value suggestion suggesting that the setting is 3 or more. Further, it is a suggestion of the set value that a cross black BAR double-aligned roll appears during the freeze effect, for example, a set value suggestion suggesting that the setting is 6. Regardless of the setting, after the freeze effect is generated with the above-mentioned predetermined probability, the probability that a cross black BAR single-matched roll or a cross black BAR double-matched roll will appear during the freeze effect is set. It is configured to be different depending on the value (a roll with a cross black BAR single match appears at setting 3 or higher, does not appear at setting 2 or lower, and a roll with a cross black BAR double match appears at setting 6). Alternatively, if a freeze effect occurs when a predetermined strong watermelon (strong watermelon 2) is won, a uniform cross black BAR single will appear, and then a predetermined strength with such a freeze effect will appear. The winning probability of the watermelon and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect may be different depending on the set value (the freeze effect is generated when the setting is 3 or more, and the freeze effect is not generated when the setting is 2 or less). Watermelon 3) If a freeze effect occurs at the time of winning, the cross black BAR double alignment will appear uniformly, and then the winning probability of the predetermined strong watermelon accompanied by such freeze effect and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect. May be configured to be different depending on the set value (a freeze effect is generated in the setting 6 and no freeze effect is generated in the setting 5 or less). A configuration in which these are combined to suggest a set value may be used.

In any case, the setting value suggestion is restricted from the execution of these lottery by setting the situation where the setting value suggestion is performed to the situation where the execution of the transition lottery to the attack mode or the additional lottery is restricted. As an alternative to that, it can weaken the impression that it is a loss.

(5) The winning mode is different depending on whether or not the winning mode is in the carry-over state. You may do it. Further, even in the configuration in which different winning combinations are awarded depending on whether or not the carry-over state is in progress, the number of medals to be paid out may be different as a privilege given by each winning combination. In these cases, by making the number of payouts in the carry-over state larger than the number of payouts before the transition to the carry-over state, it is possible to compensate for the feeling of loss at the time of winning a specific role in the carry-over state by acquiring medals.

Further, a configuration in which the number of payouts is different may be used for suggesting a set value. For example, the winning probability of a specific winning combination in which the first number of medals will be paid out at the time of winning in the carry-over state and the winning probability of the specific winning combination in which the second number of medals will be paid out are set according to the set values. Make it different. In this way, the set value can be suggested by the difference in the number of medals paid out.

(6) As a bonus duplication role, in the specific role with index value IV = 35 to 48, the lottery for transition to the attack mode or the additional lottery is not performed, but the specific role as the bonus duplication role also has the attack mode. It may be configured to perform a transition lottery to the above, or an additional lottery. In this case, it is preferable that the winning probability of each winning combination does not differ depending on the set value. Further, although the stop result is partially common, such as the relationship between the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong cherry 3 and the relationship between the strong watermelons 1 to 3 and the strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment, Whether or not a lottery for shifting to an attack mode or the like or an additional lottery is executed, and the difference in the winning probability depending on the set value may be diverted to these bonus overlapping roles.

(7) Based on the specific role, the lottery for transition to the attack mode and the additional lottery will be performed, and the benefits of such lottery will occur after the next game. It may be a configuration that can be enjoyed. For example, a duplicate combination of a specific combination and a bell is provided, and whether the specific combination winning or the bell winning is established is different depending on the pushing order, and a lottery is made as to whether or not the pushing order notification is executed in the game. It may be configured to perform.

(8) The winning mode that can be stopped before the transition to the carry-over state and the winning mode that can be stopped during the carry-over state are not limited to the above. For example, in the carry-over state, the specific combination prize may be established in the winning mode that is the reach when the specific combination is won. In this case, each winning mode may be set so that the reach eyes that appear differ depending on the bonus (first BB or second BB) that triggered the transition to the carry-over state.

(9) The winning mode is different depending on whether or not the player is in the carry-over state, but the winning stop may be different without winning the prize.

(10) The winning mode that can be stopped during the carry-over state may be a winning mode composed of a bonus symbol that causes a bonus transition and a symbol adjacent to the bonus symbol. Specifically, for example, the first BB prize is adjacent to the "red 7" symbol where the "red 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R shifts to the bonus state by stopping on the effective line. Specified by stopping the symbol (for example, the 8th "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the 13th "1st replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R) on the effective line. As a role, a strong cherry 1 prize will be established. Then, the pull-in priority during the carry-over state is set to give priority to the bonus over the small role. By doing this, if you win a specific role while in the carry-over state, if you stop aiming at the specific role, you will draw in the bonus symbol instead of the symbol corresponding to the specific role, and a bonus prize will be generated. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the winning of a specific role.

(11) In addition to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, CBs (1st CB to 4th CB) are provided as transitional roles whose small winning combination probabilities can change due to the transition of the gaming state, but in addition to or in place of these transitional roles. Other transition roles may be provided. As other transition roles, MB (middle bonus) that does not have a limit on the number of sliding frames, REG (regular bonus) that has a smaller maximum number of acquisitions than the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and 1 game JAC game can be executed. SB (single bonus) etc. can be considered. In addition, the maximum number of acquisitions for each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit acquisition number in the CB state may be 3 cards, which is less than 15 cards, or 0 cards.

(12) Although the medal is not paid out at the time of winning the transitional combination, the medal may be paid out.

(13) When the bonus is won, a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like or an additional lottery may be performed, or a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like or an additional lottery may be performed during the bonus. In this case, there is no setting difference in the winning probability, the number of winnings, the transition to the attack mode during the bonus, the probability of the additional lottery, and the advantage. It is advisable to not perform these lottery when a certain bonus is won.

(14) In the lottery process in the carry-over state in which the bonus winning flag is set, the winning combination with the bonus etc. is allowed and the bonus winning flag is not set. It may be configured not to win.

(15) In order to prevent a difference in the probability and advantage of the transition lottery to the attack mode and the additional lottery depending on the set value, the lottery is performed based on the lottery result with no particular setting difference, but the setting difference. Although the lottery is performed based on the result of a certain lottery, the setting difference may be prevented by adjusting the benefits at the time of winning (the winning probability of the privilege, the transition lottery, etc. and the number of additional games). For example, in setting 1, a specific winning combination is provided with a probability of winning with a probability of 1/100, and in setting 6 with a probability of winning with a probability of 1/10. In the case of setting 6, it is set to 1/2, and in setting 6, it is set to 1/20. By doing so, the total additional winning probability is 1/200 regardless of any set value, and there is no setting difference.

(16) Although the auxiliary display unit 65 is mainly configured to generate the effect for suggesting the set value, another display unit is provided as another notification means, and the effect for suggesting the set value is provided on the other display unit. May be configured to generate.

(17) If a specific role is won during the carry-over state, the lottery for transition to the attack mode or the additional lottery will not be performed. Instead, the winning mode may change or the set value may be suggested. However, even if the transition lottery or the additional lottery is not performed (the execution of the lottery is restricted), the first advantageous state such as a bonus and the second advantageous state such as the attack mode are master-slave. Good relationships can be maintained and the fairness of the game is guaranteed.

(18) Depending on the display mode when the carry-over state is entered, the winning mode may be different, the probability of occurrence of the setting value suggestion or the push instruction notification effect may be different, or the points given by the stop roll may be different. May be good. For example, when the display mode is the normal mode and the carry-over state is entered and the strong cherry 1 is won during the carry-over state, and when the display mode is the attack mode, the carry-over state is changed and the carry-over state is in progress. The configuration may be different depending on whether or not the middle white BAR alignment can be stopped depending on whether or not the strong cherry 1 is won.

(19) Depending on the type of RT setting flag when the RT setting flag is cleared (step S608) when the bonus is won, that is, the game state at the time of winning the bonus, the winning mode in the carry-over state and the setting value suggestion. Or, the probability of occurrence of the push instruction notification effect may be different, or the points given by the stop roll may be different. For example, there are cases where one strong cherry is won during the carry-over state where the bonus is won during the 1st RT state, and 1 strong cherry is won during the carry-over state where the bonus is won during the 2nd RT state. It may be configured to make different whether or not the white BARs are aligned.

(20) The trigger for the transition to the attack mode or the like or the additional lottery is not limited to the above-mentioned specific combination, and for example, these lottery may be performed based on the push order bell or the push order replay winning. Further, although the lottery is performed as a process for dealing with the lottery result when each winning combination is won, the lottery may be performed on condition of winning. In addition, these lottery may be performed according to the stop result at the time of winning each winning combination. Further, the lottery may be performed according to the number of times each winning combination is won.

(21) Transition to Attack Mode, etc. By winning the lottery or additional lottery, it is basically decided that an event that is advantageous to the player will occur, but for example, an end lottery such as the attack mode may be performed. However, it may be configured to perform a subtraction lottery for the number of continuous games.

(22) As a lottery for transition to attack mode, etc., a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a transition to attack mode, etc., but the transition to attack mode, etc. is confirmed or a transition lottery is executed. It may be configured to perform a subtraction lottery for the number of games.

(23) Although the game in the situation where the number of bets is 3 has been mainly described, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game in which the number of bets is 1 or a 2-bet game in which the number of bets is 2. For example, even if a specific winning combination is won when the carry-over state is played in a one-bet game, the winning mode may be changed. In this case, in order to suppress the medal loss at the time of bonus winning, when the bonus winning is to be established in the 1-bet game and the specific role is won, the lottery to shift to the attack mode is not performed. Can be an alternative to. In addition, even if the situation is not in the carry-over state, if the 3-bet game is configured to perform the transition lottery to the attack mode, while the 1-bet game is not configured to shift to the attack mode, the 1-bet game is taken. Sometimes, even if a specific winning combination is won, the winning mode may be changed.

(24) Transition to attack mode Lottery, etc. is performed (such lottery during the carry-over state is restricted). Strong cherries 1 and 2 and strong watermelons 1 to 3 are used as specific roles, but when the specific role is won. The winning probability of the above lottery and the number of additional games may be different. For example, the strong cherry 2 may be configured to be easier to win the transition lottery to the attack mode than the strong cherry 1, or the number of additional games may be large. Further, the strong watermelons 1 to 3 may be configured so that the winning probability of the transition lottery and the number of additional games are different. For example, the strong watermelon 1, the strong watermelon 2, and the strong watermelon 3 are easily won in the transition lottery. Alternatively, the number of additional games may be increased.

(25) The payout rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest payout rate and setting 6 has the highest payout rate. However, depending on the set value, the payout rate (game medium) Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of are changed. For example, the payout rates of some of the set values may be the same, such as the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2, but the payout rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in the settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases in a short time and the amount of balls ejected decreases in a long time, and in the settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The reduction of a predetermined amount may be shorter than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease of the ball output hardly occurs. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(26) The white BAR eye-pushing instruction notification effect and the black BAR eye-pressing instruction notification effect are generated as the first stop OFF time effect, and whether or not such an effect is generated by the stop roll of the first stop reel is different. Although it is configured, the occurrence timing and occurrence conditions are not limited to such a configuration. For example, it may be configured to generate a push instruction notification effect at the start of reel rotation, and a white BAR push instruction notification effect is generated uniformly (by lottery) when a strong cherry is won, and uniformly (by lottery) when a strong watermelon is won. It may be configured to generate a black BAR push instruction notification effect.

(27) In any or all of the strong cherries 1 and 2 and the strong watermelons 1 to 3, the winning probability is different depending on the set value, and then the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like is used as an opportunity for the additional lottery. May be good.

(28) Although the stop rolls are different depending on whether or not the carry-over state is in progress, the stop drive control mode before the stop may be different, such as different numbers of slide frames for the slide control.

(29) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, five reels and corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to one line in the situation where the number of bets is three has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be five lines.

(30) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having ball throwing and ball payout functions such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls can be solved.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The invention shown in each of the following feature groups is "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. However, it is known that a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, for a slot machine, a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. And the stop result of the reel is the internal lottery. When the result corresponds to the above-mentioned result, a privilege according to the result is given (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined migration result and the transition pattern combination corresponding to the migration result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is specified to be advantageous for the player. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the transition result winning until the pattern combination for the transition stops at the effective position is performed. Function to execute) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), the advantageous lottery for executing the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state which is advantageous for the player and different from the specific state is executed. Means (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), the limiting means for limiting the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means ( The function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to a specific state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state different from the specific state may be performed, and the playability is remarkably improved by the chain between the specific state and the advantageous state. do. However, in the state where the transition to the specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state is further performed, the stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for the transition, and the transition to the specific state is performed. There is a possibility that the act of causing an unlimited number of advantageous lottery will be performed by making it difficult to generate the transition. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. It is not preferable, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the specific state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the advantageous lottery, and the fairness of the game can be ensured. can. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

The "advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state" includes "lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state", "lottery for whether or not to end the advantageous state", "lottery for the continuation rate of the advantageous state", and the like. "Lottery for increasing / decreasing the number of continuous games in an advantageous state", "lottery for transition to an advantageous state with multiple stages", "lottery for transition from an advantageous state to another state", and the like are included.

Feature A2. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined migration result and the transition pattern combination corresponding to the migration result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is specified to be advantageous for the player. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the transition result winning until the pattern combination for the transition stops at the effective position is performed. Function to execute) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), the advantageous lottery for executing the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state which is advantageous for the player and different from the specific state is executed. Means (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), the limiting means for limiting the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means ( The function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) and
When the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is restricted by the restricting means, the specific privilege granting means (main control) capable of granting a specific privilege different from the advantageous state based on the specific result winning. (Function to execute stop information setting processing by device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for the transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to a specific state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state different from the specific state may be performed, and the playability is remarkably improved by the chain between the specific state and the advantageous state. do. However, in the state where the transition to the specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state is further performed, the stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for the transition, and the transition to the specific state is performed. There is a possibility that the act of causing an unlimited number of advantageous lottery will be performed by making it difficult to generate the transition. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. It is not preferable, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the specific state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the advantageous lottery, and the fairness of the game can be ensured. can.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination itself for transition, there are many situations where the execution of the advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, and the player may feel lost. Therefore, when such a situation occurs, a specific privilege is given instead of executing the advantageous lottery, so that it is possible not to give a sense of loss due to the absence of the advantageous lottery. Become. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

The "advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state" includes "lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state", "lottery for whether or not to end the advantageous state", "lottery for the continuation rate of the advantageous state", and the like. "Lottery for increasing / decreasing the number of continuous games in an advantageous state", "lottery for transition to an advantageous state with multiple stages", "lottery for transition from an advantageous state to another state", and the like are included.

Feature A3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the orbitals stops in the first stop order, the first result winning can be established, and each of the orbitals is different from the first stop order. The order correspondence result (push order replay, push order bell) that enables the second result winning different from the first result to be established when stopped in the stop order of 2 is included.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order correspondence result, the special notification means (push order notification) capable of executing the special notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order of each orbiting body by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) ( It is equipped with a function to execute push order notification processing by the display control device 81).
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the advantageous state is a state in which the special notification is executed by the special notification means.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the result corresponds to the order, the result of winning the prize differs depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, so that the advantage for the player may change. Then, it is considered that the player wants to receive a special notification regarding the stop order. In that respect, in a specific situation where the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state by the advantageous lottery means is restricted, the player may feel lost because the processing related to the special notification is not performed. Therefore, the feeling of loss can be reduced by giving a specific privilege instead.

Feature A4. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the specific privilege granting means can perform suggestion notification regarding a set value set by the setting means as the specific privilege.

According to the above configuration, when the execution of the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state is restricted, the suggestion notification of the set value may be performed. The set value causes a change in the increase / decrease rate and the increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and information such as which set value is set can be said to be useful information for the player. More specifically, if the suggestion notification that the increase / decrease rate of the game medium is a high set value is given, it can be motivated to continue the game, and it is suggested that the increase / decrease rate etc. is a low set value. If notified, it can be a motivation to move the game table. Therefore, if the suggestion notification of the set value can be performed instead of limiting the advantageous lottery at the time of winning the specific result as described above, the merit of the suggestion notification of the set value and the advantageous lottery are limited. It is possible to realize playability by balancing with the demerits of the above, and it is possible not only to reduce the feeling of loss but also to provide new games such as playability by these balances.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the advantage based on the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is common regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when the advantageous lottery is performed based on the specific result, the advantage of the advantageous lottery is common regardless of the set value, while the specific privilege given based on the specific result is the same. It is a suggestion of a common setting value, and the exact opposite event can occur based on a specific result. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel playability such that the opposite event occurs at the time of winning a specific result depending on whether or not the winning of the transition result is reserved.

Feature A6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the transition result winning is not reserved in the reservation means, the first specific pattern combination (middle white BAR off, cross black BAR is removed) at the effective position. The first means (function to execute the right reel limitation process by the main control device 101) that controls the stop drive of each orbiting body so that the (disengagement) can be stopped, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means, the second specific pattern different from the first specific pattern combination is in the effective position. A second means (right reel first by the main control device 101) that controls the stop drive of each orbiting body so that the combination (for example, middle white BAR alignment, cross black BAR single alignment, cross black BAR double alignment) can be stopped. Function to execute restriction release processing and second restriction release processing) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the stop result changes depending on whether the advantageous lottery is performed based on the winning of the specific result or the specific privilege is given. While making it difficult to recognize (that it was a specific result) that the execution of the advantageous lottery is restricted due to such a change in the stop roll, or making it aware that it was a specific result, the feeling of loss. It is possible to give a specific privilege by making a flashy stop roll that compensates for.

Feature A7. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in a state where the transition result winning is not reserved in the reservation means, the second specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature A6, which comprises means for controlling the stop drive of each orbiting body so that the second specific pattern combination does not stop when the operating means is operated.

According to the above configuration, until the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means, the second specific pattern combination cannot be made to appear even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the second specific pattern combination. By doing so, it is possible to guarantee the rarity of the appearance of the second specific pattern combination while the transition result is reserved.

Feature A8. The operation timing of the stop operation means that enables the second specific pattern combination to be stopped while the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means is a state in which the transition result winning is not reserved in the reservation means. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the same timing as the operation timing of the stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, even if the target timing is the same, whether or not the second specific pattern combination appears is clearly different depending on whether or not the transition result is reserved. In this way, regardless of whether or not the transition result is reserved, it is possible to enjoy the effect of making the stop result different without forcing a different stop operation when the result is a specific result.

Feature A9. The lottery is performed when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result while the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means, and when the transition result winning is not reserved in the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, wherein the type of result that can be won in the game is different depending on the case where the lottery result by the means is the specific result. ..

According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to impose a special control mode in order to make the stop result different depending on whether or not the transition result is reserved. That is, if the results that can be won are the same, a special control mode is required, for example, changing the winning mode itself in which the specific result winning is established depending on whether or not the reservation is in progress. If the type of result itself is different as in the above, it is sufficient to perform control according to the winning combination without using such a special control mode. You can expect the effect of making them different.

Feature A10. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result while the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means, the specific result can be established in the game. When a predetermined result (1st BB or 2nd BB) different from the above is included, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result while the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the predetermined result is not included as a result of being able to establish a prize in the game.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined result and the specific result are won in duplicate during the reservation, and the predetermined result is not won in the non-reserved state. By doing so, it is only necessary to make the control different depending on whether or not a predetermined result is won, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the predetermined result is the transition result.

According to the above configuration, if a predetermined result is won, that is, if a transition result is won, it may be reserved by a reservation means, and if a specific result is won during the reservation, the specific result and the transition result can be won. Will occur. By doing so, it is not necessary to generate duplicate winnings as a predetermined result while the reservation is made, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A12. The first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination have a common pattern combination portion (in the case of a strong cherry, a "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and a "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M. If it is a strong watermelon, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M) are set to occur.
The privilege granting means is characterized in that, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the privilege corresponding to the specific result is given by stopping the common pattern combination at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of A6 to A11.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make different stop rolls appear depending on whether or not they are reserved, without making the rolls used for winning determination different. In this way, it is not necessary to change the relationship between the lottery result and the winning result depending on whether or not the reservation is in progress.

Feature A13. Regardless of whether or not the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the first specific pattern combination and the second specific are placed in the effective position. A third means (right reel restriction by the main control device 101) that controls the stop drive of each orbiting body so that a third specific pattern combination (triple cherry, upper watermelon alignment) different from the pattern combination of the above can be stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A12, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the third specific pattern combination when the result is a specific result, the third specific pattern combination appears regardless of whether or not the reservation is in progress, and the stop result is It does not change. By doing so, depending on whether or not the game is reserved, the stop result may or may not change, and the game may be diversified.

Feature A14. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (weak cherry, weak watermelon) different from the specific result, when the stop operation means is operated at the timing at which the third specific pattern combination can be stopped, the stop operation means is operated. While the fourth specific pattern combination that makes it possible to establish the special result prize can be stopped, the stop operation is performed at the timing that makes it possible to stop the first specific pattern combination or the second specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein when the means is operated, the fourth specific pattern combination cannot be stopped.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means may be a special result in addition to the specific result, the special result must be stopped at the timing when the third specific pattern combination can be stopped. As a result, the fourth specific pattern combination that is a prize cannot be stopped, and so-called omission may occur. Therefore, it is considered that the stop operation is usually performed at the timing at which the third specific pattern combination can be stopped, and the rarity of the appearance of the first specific pattern combination or the second specific pattern combination is increased. be able to.

Feature A15. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means, the stop operation means is operated at the timing at which the second specific pattern combination can be stopped. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that it is provided with an instruction effect means (a function of executing a process for special notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing an instruction effect.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the second specific pattern combination, the second specific pattern combination can be aimed by the instruction effect in the configuration where the special result may be missed. ..

Feature A16. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
A15 characterized by being provided with suggestion notification means capable of performing suggestion notification regarding a set value set by the setting means according to at least one of the occurrence frequency, generation mode, and effect mode of the instruction effect. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the setting value is suggested according to the occurrence frequency, the generation mode, and the effect mode of the instruction effect as well as the change of the stop roll. The set value causes a change in the increase / decrease rate and the increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and information such as which set value is set can be said to be useful information for the player. More specifically, if the suggestion notification that the increase / decrease rate of the game medium is a high set value is given, it can be motivated to continue the game, and it is suggested that the increase / decrease rate etc. is a low set value. If notified, it can be a motivation to move the game table. Therefore, if the suggestion notification of the set value can be performed during the reservation as described above, the game is performed while expecting a specific result that triggers the suggestion notification of the set value during the reservation. It is possible to keep the interest in the game uninterrupted even if the execution of the advantageous lottery is restricted.

In particular, since the suggestion notification is performed in association with the change in the stop result as described above, it is possible to make the person think that the suggestion notification is executed by his / her own stop operation, and the interest is improved.

In relation to the "specific privilege granting means", the "suggestion notification means" may be provided by the "specific privilege granting means", or the "suggestion notification means" may be the "specific privilege granting means". ..

Feature A17. The suggestion notification means performs the suggestion notification when the stop operation means is operated at a timing when the second specific pattern combination can be stopped in a situation where the instruction effect is performed. The feature A16 is characterized in that the suggestion notification is not performed when the operation of the stop operation means is performed at the timing when the second specific pattern combination cannot be stopped in the situation where the instruction effect is performed. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, on the premise of a configuration in which a special result winning may be missed when aiming at the second specific pattern combination, it is possible to make the presence or absence of the suggestion notification different depending on the operation mode by the stop operation means. In other words, it is considered that the stop operation is usually performed in an operation mode that does not cause omission, and based on such a premise, the set value is set by performing the stop operation in a different operation mode than usual. If the suggestion notification of the above is performed, it is possible to motivate the stop operation to be performed in the different operation modes, and it is possible to prevent the configuration in which the stop result is changed from being wasted. Can be done.

Feature A18. As the specific result, the first specific result (strong cherries 1 and 2) and the second specific result (strong watermelon 1 to 3) different from the first specific result are included.
The second means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, as the second specific pattern combination, the first type specific pattern combination (middle stage white BAR alignment) can be stopped. Performs stop drive control and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, the second specific pattern combination is a second type specific pattern combination different from the first type specific pattern combination (cross black BAR single alignment, The stop drive control of each orbiter is performed so that the cross black BAR double alignment) can be stopped.
In the first specific orbiting body (middle reel 32M) of each of the above orbiting bodies, the above-mentioned timing at which the symbols constituting the first type specific symbol combination (the "white BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M) can be stopped. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the pattern constituting the type 2 specific pattern combination in the first specific orbiting body cannot be stopped, and the type 2 specific pattern in the first specific orbiting body cannot be stopped. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at the timing at which the symbols constituting the combination can be stopped, the symbols constituting the type 1 specific symbol combination cannot be stopped in the first specific orbiting body. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A6 to A17.

According to the above configuration, the first specific result and the second specific result are set as the specific result, and the type 1 specific pattern combination or the type 2 specific pattern combination may be stopped during the reservation. In this case, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the type 1 specific pattern combination, the type 2 specific pattern combination cannot be stopped in the first specific orbiter, and the second specific result is missed. Further, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the type 2 specific pattern combination, the type 1 specific pattern combination cannot be stopped in the first specific orbiter, and the first specific result is missed. That is, if a specific result is won during the reservation and a second specific pattern combination (type 1 specific pattern combination or type 2 specific pattern combination) is aimed at, there is a risk of being missed. Therefore, it is possible to create room for improving the playability during reservation, such as granting a specific privilege depending on the balance with the risk.

Feature A19. In the second specific orbiting body (left reel 32L) different from the first specific orbiting body among the above-mentioned orbiting bodies, the stop operation means is performed at a timing at which the patterns constituting the first type specific pattern combination can be stopped. When the stop operation of is performed, the pattern constituting the type 2 specific pattern combination can also be stopped in the second specific orbiting body, and the type 2 specific pattern combination is configured in the second specific orbiting body. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at the timing at which the pattern to be stopped can be stopped, the pattern constituting the type 1 specific pattern combination in the second specific orbiting body can also be stopped. Features A game machine according to A18.

According to the above configuration, the second specific orbiter does not drop out regardless of the type of the specific result. In this way, by using the first specific orbiter that does not miss each other and the second specific orbiter that does not miss each other, while predicting whether it is the first specific result or the second specific result. A game is added in which the stop operation of each orbiting body is performed, and the game can be made into a multi-step game.

Feature A20. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result in the state where the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means, the stop operation means at the timing when the type 1 specific pattern combination can be stopped. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result in a state where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, at the timing when the second type specific pattern combination can be stopped. The game according to feature A18 or feature A19, which is provided with an instruction effect means (a function of executing a process for special notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing an instruction effect for operating the stop operation means. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first specific result and the second specific result may be missed each other, an instruction effect for aiming at each of them may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the omission by the occurrence of the instruction effect while leaving the enjoyment of the stop operation such as the presence or absence of the omission.

Feature A21. The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, a privilege corresponding to the specific result is given.
Even when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the second specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the feature A6 to the feature A6 to be characterized in that the privilege corresponding to the specific result is given. The gaming machine according to any one of A20.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop rolls are different, the benefits given are the same, and it is possible to prevent the advantages and disadvantages of the benefits given depending on the target location from occurring.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined migration result and the transition pattern combination corresponding to the migration result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is specified to be advantageous for the player. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the transition result winning until the pattern combination for the transition stops at the effective position is performed. Function to execute) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), the advantageous lottery for executing the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state which is advantageous for the player and different from the specific state is executed. Means (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), the limiting means for limiting the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means ( The function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (strong cherry 2, strong watermelon 2, 3) in a state where the transition result winning is not reserved by the reservation means, the first specific pattern combination is placed in the effective position. The first means (function to execute the right reel limiting process by the main control device 101) to execute the stop drive control of each orbiter so that (the middle white BAR is out and the cross black BAR is out) can be stopped.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (strong cherry 2, strong watermelon 2, 3) while the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the first specific pattern is placed in the effective position. The second means (second means) for executing the stop drive control of each orbital body so that the second specific pattern combination (middle stage white BAR alignment, cross black BAR single alignment, cross black BAR double alignment) different from the combination can be stopped. (Function to execute the right reel first limit release process and second limit release process) by the main controller 101),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege granting means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to a specific state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state different from the specific state may be performed, and the playability is remarkably improved by the chain between the specific state and the advantageous state. do. However, in the state where the transition to the specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state is further performed, the stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for the transition, and the transition to the specific state is performed. There is a possibility that the act of causing an unlimited number of advantageous lottery will be performed by making it difficult to generate the transition. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. It is not preferable, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the specific state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the advantageous lottery, and the fairness of the game can be ensured. can.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination itself for transition, there are many situations where the execution of the advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, and the player may feel lost. Therefore, when such a situation occurs, it is advantageous due to such a change in the stop result by making the stop result different from the case where the advantageous lottery is performed based on the specific result winning. It is a flashy stop roll that makes it not possible to recognize (that it was a specific result) that the execution of the lottery is restricted, or makes it aware that it was a specific result, but compensates for the feeling of loss. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state" includes "lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state", "lottery for whether or not to end the advantageous state", "lottery for the continuation rate of the advantageous state", and the like. "Lottery for increasing / decreasing the number of continuous games in an advantageous state", "lottery for transition to an advantageous state with multiple stages", "lottery for transition from an advantageous state to another state", and the like are included.

Feature B2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the second means is a specific orbital body (right reel 32R) among the orbiting bodies. ) Is different from the control mode of the stop drive control for the specific orbiter in the first means, while the stop drive control for the orbiting body different from the specific orbiter. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the control mode is not different, and the second specific pattern combination can be stopped.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the stop result is changed depending on whether or not the transition result is reserved, the control mode of the stop drive control of all the orbiters is not different, but is specified as a part of the orbiters. Since only the control mode of the orbiting body is different, the same control mode can be diverted to other orbiting bodies regardless of whether or not they are reserved. In particular, while the transition result winning is reserved, it is necessary to notify that the transition to a specific state will occur after that, or to stop the so-called reach to notify the transition result winning. It is not preferable to require complicated stop drive control for the change of the stop result. Further, if it is attempted to memorize the stop rolls of the all-circumferential body depending on whether or not they are reserved and to memorize the control mode for each stop roll, the amount of stored data can be enormous. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to realize playability by diversifying the stop rolls while not increasing the processing load and reducing the amount of stored data.

Feature B3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the privilege granting means laps differently from the specific orbiter of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination at the effective position. Common pattern combination part composed of bodies (for strong cherry 2, "black BAR" symbol of right reel 32R and "white BAR" symbol of middle reel 32M, for strong watermelons 2 and 3, "black" of right reel 32R The gaming machine according to feature B2, which is characterized in that a privilege corresponding to the specific result is given based on the "BAR" symbol and the "white BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M) being stopped.

According to the above configuration, the winning judgment based on the winning of the specific result can be performed by the common pattern combination portion, and even if the first specific pattern combination is stopped in the state where the reservation is not in progress, the prize combination is in progress. Even when the second specific pattern combination is stopped, it is not necessary to make the data for winning determination different. Therefore, it is not necessary to store each of the winning determination data, and the amount of stored data can be further reduced.

Feature B4. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
When the first set value (setting 1) is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result and the second set value different from the first set value by the setting means ( Described in any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result when the setting 6) is set is set to be the same probability. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, if the specific result is the same, the winning probability is the same regardless of whether the set value is the first set value or the second set value. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game such as a change in the stop result at the time of winning a specific result within a range that does not affect the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium.

Further, by setting the same winning probability regardless of the set value, it is possible to avoid being restricted by a predetermined process based on the result that the winning probability differs depending on the set value. Specifically, regarding the above-mentioned advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state, if the processing related to the instruction function is performed based on the result that the winning probability differs depending on the set value, the game playability of the advantageous state becomes the rate of increase / decrease of the game medium, etc. There is a possibility that the player expects only such a game and neglects the game property of aiming at the original pattern of the slot machine and stopping it. Therefore, it should be restricted that the advantageous lottery related to the advantageous lottery is performed based on the result that the winning probability differs depending on the set value. The advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state can be performed based on the specific result, and the expandability of the game, that is, the change of the stop result at the time of winning the specific result, is significantly improved.

It should be noted that the above configuration may be expressed as "regardless of the set value set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is set to have the same probability". good.

Feature B5. As a lottery result by the lottery means, stop drive control of each orbiting body so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position in a state where the transition result winning is not reserved in the reservation means. Is executed, and the stop drive control of each orbiter is executed so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position in the state where the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means. Special results (strong cherry 3, strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment) are set,
In a situation where the first set value is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes either the specific result or the special result, and the second set value are set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes either the specific result or the special result is set to be different from the probability.

According to the above configuration, a special result is set in addition to the specific result as the result of stopping the first specific pattern combination, and the winning probability of the specific result and the special result combined is different for each set value. Therefore, even if the winning probability of the specific result that the stop result changes to the second specific pattern combination is common to each set value, it changes to the second specific pattern combination (not a special result). It can be used to help determine the set value through (being a specific result).

Feature B6. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
When the first set value (setting 1) is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result and the second set value different from the first set value by the setting means ( Described in any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result when the setting 6) is set is set to be different from the probability. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the same specific result is obtained, the winning probability differs depending on the set value. By doing so, the game in which the stop result at the time of winning a specific result changes depending on the game state can be influenced by the increase / decrease rate and the increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and through such a change in the stop result. , It is also possible to suggest a set value.

Feature B7. As a lottery result by the lottery means, stop drive control of each orbiting body so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position in a state where the transition result winning is not reserved in the reservation means. Is executed, and the stop drive control of each orbiter is executed so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position in the state where the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means. Special results (strong cherry 3, strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment) are set,
In a situation where the first set value is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes either the specific result or the special result, and the second set value are set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes either the specific result or the special result is set to be the same probability in the present situation.

According to the above configuration, a special result is set in addition to the specific result as the result that the first specific pattern combination is stopped, and the appearance rate of the first specific pattern combination is irrespective of the set value before reservation. The appearance rate will be the same, and the appearance rate of the second specific pattern combination during reservation will be different depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to guess the set value through the appearance of the second specific pattern combination in the second gaming state.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined migration result and the transition pattern combination corresponding to the migration result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is specified to be advantageous for the player. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the transition result winning until the pattern combination for the transition stops at the effective position is performed. Function to execute) and
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a specific result (strong cherries 1 to 3, strong watermelon 1) in which the privilege is given by the privilege giving means when the specific pattern combination predetermined in the effective position is stopped. ~ 4) is provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result (strong cherry 3, strong watermelon 4) among the specific results, an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player and different from the specific state is performed. On the other hand, if the specific result is a second specific result (strong cherries 1, 2, strong watermelons 1 to 3) different from the first specific result, the advantageous lottery means (main control) that does not execute the advantageous lottery. The function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), the limiting means for limiting the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means ( The function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for the transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to a specific state that is advantageous to the player, and if the transition pattern combination does not stop, the transition result winning is reserved. In such a configuration, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific result, an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state different from the specific state may be performed, and the playability is remarkably improved by the chain between the specific state and the advantageous state. Improve to. However, in the state where the transition to the specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state is further performed, the stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for the transition, and the transition to the specific state is performed. There is a possibility that the act of causing an unlimited number of advantageous lottery will be performed by making it difficult to generate the transition. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. It is not preferable, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the specific state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the advantageous lottery, and the fairness of the game can be ensured. can.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination itself for transition, there are many situations where the execution of the advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, and the player may feel lost. In that respect, in the above configuration, a second specific result is provided as a result of the specific pattern combination being stopped and winning as the same stop result as the first specific result that triggers the advantageous lottery, and the second specific result is advantageous. I tried not to hold a lottery. Therefore, while the transition result is reserved, it is not apparent whether the execution of the advantageous lottery was restricted by the first specific result winning or whether the advantageous lottery was not executed in the second specific result winning in the first place. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not to give a feeling of loss due to the fact that the advantageous lottery is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

The "advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state" includes "lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state", "lottery for whether or not to end the advantageous state", "lottery for the continuation rate of the advantageous state", and the like. "Lottery for increasing / decreasing the number of continuous games in an advantageous state", "lottery for transition to an advantageous state with multiple stages", "lottery for transition from an advantageous state to another state", and the like are included.

Feature C2. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the advantage based on the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is common regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when the advantageous lottery is performed based on the specific result, the advantage of the advantageous lottery is common regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game based on the advantageous lottery from being involved in changes such as the increase / decrease rate of the game medium, and such a game can be given a privilege by aiming at the pattern which is the main game of the so-called slot machine. It is possible to strengthen the impression that it is an incidental game of the game of obtaining.

Feature C3. When the first set value (setting 1) is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific result and the second setting different from the first set value by the setting means. The game according to feature C2, wherein when the value (setting 6) is set, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific result is set to be different from the probability. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the second specific result differs depending on the set value among the first specific result and the second specific result in which whether or not the advantageous lottery is executed is different even if the same stop result is obtained. It will be. That is, it is possible to make the occurrence rate of events that do not win the advantageous lottery even if a specific pattern combination appears different depending on the set value. As a result, the same event can be generated without making the winning probability on the first specific result side or the winning probability of the advantageous lottery different depending on the set value.

Feature C4. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result or the second specific result while the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, it is the first specific result or the second. It is provided with suggestion notification means (a function of executing the right reel restriction process by the main control device 101 and a function of executing the process of step S2211 by the display control device 81) capable of executing the suggestion notification suggesting that the result is a specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

According to the above configuration, if the first specific result or the second specific result is won in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the limitation by the limiting means is performed depending on whether or not the advantageous lottery is executed. While making it difficult to understand what was done, there are cases where a suggestion notification is performed that suggests whether the first specific result or the second specific result was, so while enjoying the effect of making the restriction difficult to understand. , It is possible to add a game to guess the obscured point, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature C5. In the suggestion notification means, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the suggestion notification can be performed by changing the mode of stop drive control of each orbiting body depending on the specific result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suggest which result was obtained by making the mode of stop drive control different for the first specific result and the second specific result, which have a common stop result, while the reservation is in progress. , It is possible to perform a game such as guessing the result based on the difference in the stop drive control during reservation.

Feature C6. The suggestion notification means is
Special control that makes it possible to stop a pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The execution rate of (the right reel first restriction release process and the second limit release process by the main controller 101) is set as the first execution rate.
Special control that makes it possible to stop a pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. By setting the execution rate of (the right reel first limit release process and the second limit release process by the main control device 101) to a second execution rate different from the first execution rate.
The gaming machine according to feature C5, which is capable of performing the suggestion notification.

According to the above configuration, the set value can be estimated through the change of the stop roll. In this case, the stop result may change for the first specific result, and the stop result may change for the second specific result. Therefore, the first specific result and the second specific result are referred to. While enjoying the effect of obscuring it, it can be a suggestion.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The game state is played based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result, and the pattern combination for the first transition corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. The first specific state is shifted to a person's advantage, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result, and the pattern for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result at the effective position. Based on the combination being stopped, the transition means (execution of the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the second specific state which is advantageous for the player and different from the first specific state. Function to do) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, the symbol combination for the first transition is stopped at the effective position or the symbol combination for the second transition is stopped. Until the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning is reserved (a function of executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), it is an advantageous state for the player and different from the first specific state and the second specific state. Advantageous lottery means (function to execute first specific combination processing to third specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and
In a state where the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the advantage by the advantageous lottery means. A limiting means for limiting the execution of the lottery (a function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) and
When the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is restricted by the limiting means, the first specific control is executed based on the specific result winning. Means (a function to execute the stop information setting process in the situation where the first BB winning flag is set by the main control device 101) and
When the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is restricted by the limiting means, the second specific control is different from the first specific control based on the specific result winning. 2 Second means for executing specific control (a function for executing stop information setting processing in a situation where the second BB winning flag is set by the main control device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and the first transition result or the said first transition result. When the pattern combination for the first transition or the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result is stopped, the player shifts to a specific state advantageous to the player, and the pattern combinations for the first and second transitions are stopped. If not, the first transition result winning and the second transition result winning are reserved. In such a configuration, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state different from the first specific state or the second specific state may be performed, and the first specific state or the second specific state may be performed. The gameability is significantly improved by the chain of the state and the advantageous state. However, in the state where the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state is further performed, the pattern combination for the first and second transitions is not stopped. There is a possibility that an act of causing an unlimited number of advantageous lottery may be performed by performing a stop operation or the like to prevent the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state from occurring easily. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the first and second transitions and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and the game It is not preferable from the viewpoint of fairness, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the advantageous lottery, and the game can be played. Fairness can be guaranteed.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination itself for the first and second transitions, there are many situations where the execution of the advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, and the player loses. You can feel like it. In that respect, in the above configuration, different specific controls are performed depending on whether the specific result is won during the reservation to the first specific state and the specific result is won during the reservation to the second specific state. .. Therefore, although none of the advantageous lottery is executed, a game is added that predicts which specific state is reserved through the different specific control, for example, when the advantage due to the specific control is different. Is a reservation in a specific state in which specific control on the advantageous side is performed, and further, it is possible to realize a novel game in which it is desired to win a specific result that is subject to the restriction of the advantageous lottery. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

The "advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state" includes "lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state", "lottery for whether or not to end the advantageous state", "lottery for the continuation rate of the advantageous state", and the like. This includes "lottery for increasing / decreasing the number of continuous games in an advantageous state", "lottery for transitioning to an advantageous state with multiple stages", and "lottery for transitioning from an advantageous state to another state".

Feature D2. The specific result includes the first specific result (strong cherry 1, strong watermelon 1) and the second specific result (strong cherry 2, strong watermelon 2, 3).
The first means is a case where the first specific control is executed based on the first specific result and a case where the first specific control is executed based on the second specific result. The second specific means may be configured to have a different control mode, or the second means may execute the second specific control based on the first specific result, or the second means may execute the second specific control based on the second specific result. 2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the control mode of the second specific control can be different from that of the case where the specific control is executed.

According to the above configuration, not only the reserved transition result but also the control mode during reservation differs depending on the type of the specific result. By doing so, for example, in the case of a predetermined specific result (first specific result), if the specific control (first specific control) is performed in a predetermined control mode, the first transition result winning is won. It is possible to realize a game that can be predicted, such as being reserved.

Feature D3. Winning notification means (processing for bonus winning notification by the display control device 81) that can execute the winning notification that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first transition result or the second transition result by the predetermined notification means. Has a function to execute)
The winning notification means can execute the winning notification at a timing before the first specific control by the first means or the second specific control by the second means is executed. Feature The gaming machine described in D2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify which transition result winning is reserved at a timing prior to the first specific control and the second specific control. By doing so, in the configuration of the feature D2, instead of predicting the type of the migration result from the control mode of the specific control, after grasping the migration result based on the winning notification, the specific control based on the specific result winning. It is possible to show, and the degree of attention at the time of winning such a specific result is significantly improved.

Feature D4. The result notification means (by the display control device 81) that can execute the result notification that the lottery result by the lottery means has become the first specific result or the second specific result by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. Equipped with a function to execute specific role notification processing)
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the result notification means can execute the result notification at a timing after the winning notification by the winning notification means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to show the specific control after grasping the type of the reserved migration result and the type of the winning specific result. By doing so, the degree of attention to the specific control is significantly improved.

Feature D5. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first transition result and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second transition result are set as different probabilities.
A feature characterized in that the privilege given by performing the first specific control by the first means and the privilege given by performing the second specific control by the second means are different. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D4.

According to the above configuration, the winning result of the first transition result and the second transition result are different, and different benefits are given depending on the reserved transition result. Therefore, in relation to the benefits that can be obtained, it is possible to make a difference in expectations, such as which transition result is preferable to win. By doing so, by taking advantage of the fact that the advantageous lottery that is reserved is restricted, the gameplay that is completely different from the conventional gameplay, such as shifting to a specific state based on the transition result winning and getting a privilege, is achieved. It can be realized.

Feature D6. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (strong cherry 3 and strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment) that does not trigger the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is provided.
Either the first means or the second means executes the corresponding specific control based on the special result winning in the situation where the corresponding transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that it is possible to play.

According to the above configuration, since the specific control is performed even based on the special result winning that does not trigger the advantageous lottery, it is possible to make various events in which the specific control is performed during the reservation. Moreover, it should be difficult to visually understand whether the specific control was performed after the advantageous lottery was restricted when the specific result was won, or whether the specific control was performed when the special result was won where the advantageous lottery was not performed in the first place. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the playability of predicting the migration result reserved from the specific result and the specific control, or predicting the specific result or the specific control from the notified migration result.

Feature D7. By performing the first specific control, a stop result in a state where the first transition result winning is not reserved by the reservation means, and a state in which the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. Can be different from the stop roll at
By performing the second specific control, a stop result in a state where the second transition result winning is not reserved by the reservation means, and a state in which the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, which is characterized in that the result of the stop is different from that of the stop result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to predict which migration result is reserved through the stop roll. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the push operation and to familiarize the player with the original playability of the slot machine.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the stop result at the time of winning the specific result is different between the case where the first specific control is performed and the case where the second specific control is performed.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature D7 can be more preferably exhibited.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result (first BB, second BB), and the pattern combination for the first transition corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on this, the gaming state is shifted to the first specific state (bonus state) which is advantageous for the player, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result different from the first transition result, and the effective position. A transition means (main control device 101) for transitioning to a second specific state (CB state) different from the first specific state based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result is stopped. Function to execute bonus state processing by),
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first shift result, the reservation means (main control device 101) that reserves the first shift result winning until the pattern combination for the first shift stops at the effective position. (Function to execute the process of step S609) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), the advantageous lottery for executing the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state which is advantageous for the player and different from the specific state is executed. Means (a function of executing the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), the limitation of limiting the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means. Means (a function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) and
Equipped with
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (second small winning combination to 26th small winning combination) different from the first transition result and the second transition result is provided.
The specific result is set as a specific overlap result between the second migration result and the special result.
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific duplicate result winning in the state where the first transition result winning is not reserved by the reservation means, each of the laps so that the second transition result winning can be established. While the stop drive control of the body is performed, the special result winning can be established when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific duplicate result winning in the state where the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a specific control means (a function of executing stop information setting processing by the main control device 101) for performing stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and the first transition result or the said first transition result. When the pattern combination for the first transition or the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result is stopped, the state shifts to the corresponding specific state. Then, if the pattern combination for the first transition is not stopped, the winning of the first transition result is reserved. In such a configuration, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state different from the first specific state or the second specific state may be performed, and the first specific state or the second specific state may be performed. The gameability is significantly improved by the chain of the state and the advantageous state. However, in the state where the transition to the first specific state is confirmed, if the configuration is such that the advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state is further performed, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for the first transition. , There is a possibility that an act of preventing the transition to the first specific state from occurring easily and causing an unlimited number of advantageous lottery will be performed. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the first transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and the fairness of the game becomes remarkable. It is not preferable from the viewpoint, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the advantageous lottery, and the game can be played. Fairness can be guaranteed.

On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination itself for the first transition, there are many situations where the execution of the advantageous lottery is restricted due to a specific result, and the player feels like a loss. obtain. In that respect, in the above configuration, the specific result that triggers the advantageous lottery is set as the specific overlap result between the second transition result and the special result, and if it is not reserved, the second transition result prize is established and reserved. In the case of the above, since the special result prize is established, the result of winning can be different depending on whether or not the reservation is in progress when the result triggers an advantageous lottery. More specifically, it shifts to the second specific state before the reservation, but by not shifting to the second specific state during the reservation, depending on the advantage based on these second specific states and the special result prize. , The advantage at the time of winning a specific result can be changed depending on whether or not it is reserved. Therefore, even when the advantageous lottery is restricted, it is possible to give significance to the winning of a specific result, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

The "advantageous lottery regarding the advantageous state" includes "lottery for whether or not to shift to the advantageous state", "lottery for whether or not to end the advantageous state", "lottery for the continuation rate of the advantageous state", and the like. "Lottery for increasing / decreasing the number of continuous games in an advantageous state", "lottery for transition to an advantageous state with multiple stages", "lottery for transition from an advantageous state to another state", and the like are included.

Feature E2. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a normal result (push order bell) including the special result while not including the second transition result is set.
The advantageous lottery means is characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is won as the normal result, the advantageous lottery is not executed or the result is not shifted to the advantageous state. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, if the normal result is won, the advantageous lottery will not be performed or the advantageous state will not be entered. Therefore, from the viewpoint of whether or not the advantageous lottery is executed, the normal result is won and the reservation is in progress. It will be the same as when the specific duplication result of was won. Moreover, if a specific duplicate result is won while the reservation is in progress, a special result prize can be established, and similarly, if a commuting result is won, a special result prize can be established. Then, from the appearance of the player, it becomes difficult to understand whether the special result prize was established based on the specific duplicate result winning or the special result winning based on the normal result winning, and the player is in an advantageous state. It becomes difficult to understand whether the fact that the transition of the above does not occur is because the execution of the advantageous lottery is restricted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of loss that the advantageous lottery is restricted even though the specific duplicate result is won during the reservation.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the normal result is higher than the probability that the specific duplicate result is won.

According to the above configuration, the normal result is won with a higher probability than the specific duplicate result. Therefore, in the case of winning a specific duplicate result while reserved, the event that the special result prize is established gives a stronger impression that it is based on the normal result winning rather than the impression that it is based on the specific duplicate result winning. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the advantageous lottery based on the specific duplicate result (specific result) winning is restricted.

Feature E4. In the privilege granting means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result winning and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position, a predetermined number of benefits corresponding to the special result are stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the gaming medium is paid out.

According to the above configuration, the special result is a so-called small role in which the game medium is paid out. By doing so, the degree of freedom of control at the time of winning the specific duplication result is significantly improved. That is, for example, in the case of a replay role, it is necessary to prevent omissions, but when a specific duplicate result is won, if the second transition result prize is to be established without winning the replay as a special result, the first 2 It is necessary to control the transition result so that it will not be missed and the prize will be given priority over the replay. In that respect, as described above, if the winning combination is small, it is permissible to miss it, so that the degree of freedom of control can be improved without being subject to such restrictions.

Feature E5. The lottery means is provided with means for preventing the first transition result or the second transition result from being won in a situation where at least one of the first transition result and the second transition result is won. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4.

According to the above configuration, the so-called duplicate winning of bonuses is prevented, and the payout rate is prevented from being extremely increased. Then, if the configuration for preventing such duplicate winning is used, if the specific duplicate result is won in the situation where the first transition result winning is reserved, the special result winning is established instead of the second transition result winning. The configuration of feature E1 can be easily realized.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (carrying state) different from the first gaming state are provided.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (strong cherry 2, strong watermelon 2, 3) in the first game state, the first specific pattern combination (middle white BAR off, cross black BAR off) at the effective position. ) Is executed to stop drive control of each orbiting body so that the orbiting body can be stopped. By making the control mode of the stop drive control for the body (right reel 32R) different from the control mode when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the first gaming state, the first effective position is reached. 1 Executes the stop drive control of each orbiter so that the second specific pattern combination (middle white BAR alignment, cross black BAR single alignment, cross black BAR double alignment) different from the specific pattern combination can be stopped. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific control means (a function of executing stop information setting processing by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, different stop outcomes may be stopped according to a change in the gaming state even if the lottery result is the same. be. In this case, the control mode of the stop drive control of all the orbiters is not different, but only the control mode of the specific orbiter is different as a part of the orbiters, so that the other orbiters are different regardless of the gaming state. It is possible to divert the same control mode. By doing so, it is possible to realize diversification of stop rolls while reducing the amount of stored data as compared with the configuration in which the control mode of the all-circling body is stored for each gaming state. Can be done.

Feature F2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the privilege granting means laps differently from the specific orbiter of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination at the effective position. Common pattern combination part composed of bodies (for strong cherry 2, "black BAR" symbol of right reel 32R and "white BAR" symbol of middle reel 32M, for strong watermelons 2 and 3, "black" of right reel 32R The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that a privilege corresponding to the specific result is given based on the "BAR" symbol and the "white BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M) being stopped.

According to the above configuration, the winning determination based on the winning of the specific result can be performed by the common symbol combination portion, and even when the first specific symbol combination is stopped in the first gaming state, the second gaming state Even when the second specific pattern combination is stopped, it is not necessary to make the data for winning determination different. Therefore, in the configuration of the feature F1, it is not necessary to store not only the control mode but also the data for winning determination for each game state, and the amount of stored data can be further reduced.

Feature F3. The specific control means restricts a predetermined specific pattern from stopping at a predetermined position of the specific orbiting body in the first gaming state (for example, a "white BAR" pattern in the middle row and "black" in the upper and lower rows. (BAR) On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the feature F1 or the feature F2 is characterized in that the specific symbol is allowed to stop at the predetermined position of the specific orbiter. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, for the specific orbiting body, it is possible to greatly simplify the configuration because it is merely different whether or not the specific pattern stops at a predetermined position. In particular, by making such a restriction / permissible configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from stopping even if the second specific pattern combination is aimed at in the first game state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an event in which an unintended stop roll is stopped depending on the timing of the stop operation, even though the stop rolls are made different.

Features F4. In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination are different from the first specific pattern combination at the effective position. 3 Equipped with means (function to execute right reel restriction processing by the main control device 101) to execute stop drive control of each orbiting body so that a specific pattern combination (triple cherry, upper watermelon alignment) can be stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3.

According to the above configuration, as long as the stop operation is performed aiming at the third specific pattern combination, the stop result does not change regardless of the gaming state. That is, a game in which the stop roll changes depending on the game state and a game in which the stop roll does not change can be realized by the simple configuration described in the feature F1.

Feature F5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the privilege granting means laps differently from the specific orbiter of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination at the effective position. Common pattern combination part composed of bodies (for strong cherry 2, "black BAR" symbol of right reel 32R and "white BAR" symbol of middle reel 32M, for strong watermelons 2 and 3, "black" of right reel 32R The privilege corresponding to the specific result is given based on the "BAR" symbol and the "white BAR" symbol of the middle reel 32M), and the third specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position. It grants the privilege corresponding to the specific result based on
When the stop operation for the specific orbiting body is performed at least in a situation where the common pattern combination portion is not stopped, the patterns constituting the third specific pattern combination in the specific orbiting body are stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature F4, characterized in that the means for performing stop drive control is provided.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a third specific pattern combination is provided in addition to the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination as a stop roll corresponding to the specific result, for example, a specific lap When the stop operation is performed from the body, it becomes clear which stop roll is stopped. That is, when the stop operation is performed from the specific orbiting body, which is the difference between the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination, the first specific pattern combination or the first is performed depending on the gaming state. 2 When attempting to perform stop drive control so as to leave room for a specific pattern combination to be established, it becomes necessary to perform such control while discriminating the game state. In that respect, when the stop operation is performed from the specific orbiting body, the control can be performed by giving priority to the third specific pattern combination instead of the first specific pattern combination or the second specific pattern combination. It is possible to simplify the above.

Feature F6. As the specific result, a first specific result (strong watermelon 2) and a second specific result (strong watermelon 3) different from the first specific result are provided.
The specific control means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result and the second specific result in the first game state, each of the orbiting bodies is capable of stopping the first specific pattern combination at the effective position. While performing stop drive control of
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result in the second gaming state, by changing the control mode of the specific orbiter, the first type as the second specific pattern combination at the effective position. The stop drive control of each orbiter is executed so that a specific pattern combination (cross black BAR single alignment) can be stopped.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result in the second gaming state, the second specific pattern combination is the effective position by differentiating the control mode of the specific orbiting body. Features F1 to feature F1 to execute stop drive control of each orbiter so that a type 2 specific pattern combination (cross black BAR double alignment) different from the type 1 specific pattern combination can be stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of F5.

According to the above configuration, in the first game state, the first specific pattern combination is stopped in either the first specific result or the second specific result, and in the second game state, it is the first specific result. In the case, the type 1 specific pattern combination is stopped, and in the case of the second specific result, the type 2 specific pattern combination is stopped. That is, in the first game state, the winning result cannot be determined from the stop roll, but in the second game state, the winning result can be determined from the stop roll. By doing so, it is possible to play a game in which the winning result is grasped from the stop result according to the game state, and such a game can be realized only by changing the control mode for the specific orbiting body. It is possible to realize new playability while reducing the storage data of the control mode.

Feature F7. Described in feature F6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific result and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific result are set as different probabilities. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, in the second game state, the probability that the first type specific pattern combination appears and the probability that the second type specific pattern combination appears are different. By doing so, the side with the lower appearance probability becomes more happy (rare feeling) when it appears, and the playability that makes one look forward to which pattern combination appears is realized. In addition, for example, in a configuration in which the privilege given to the player differs depending on which pattern combination appears, the player's expectation is aroused by the relationship between the appearance probability and the given privilege. Can be done.

Feature F8. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
When the first set value (setting 1) is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result and the second set value different from the first set value by the setting means ( Described in any one of the features F1 to F7, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result when the setting 6) is set is set to be the same probability. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, if the specific result is the same, the winning probability is the same regardless of whether the set value is the first set value or the second set value. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game such as a change in the stop result at the time of winning a specific result within a range that does not affect the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium.

Further, by setting the same winning probability regardless of the set value, it is possible to avoid being restricted by a predetermined process based on the result that the winning probability differs depending on the set value. Specifically, regarding the processing related to the so-called push order combination instruction function that makes the privilege obtained by the stop order of each orbiting body different even if the result is the same, the processing is based on the result that the winning probability differs depending on the set value. If the processing related to the instruction function is performed, the game based on the instruction function may affect the increase / decrease rate of the game medium, etc., so expect only such a game and stop aiming at the original pattern of the slot machine. There is a possibility that it will be neglected because it does not have the playability of letting it. Therefore, it should be restricted that the processing related to the instruction function is performed based on the result that the winning probability differs depending on the set value. In that respect, the same winning probability is set for the specific result regardless of the set value. The processing related to the instruction function can be performed based on the specific result, and the expandability of the game, that is, the change of the stop result at the time of winning the specific result, is significantly improved.

It should be noted that the above configuration may be expressed as "regardless of the set value set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is set to have the same probability". good.

Features F9. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
When the first set value (setting 1) is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result and the second set value different from the first set value by the setting means ( Described in any one of the features F1 to F7, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result when the setting 6) is set is set to be different from the probability. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the same specific result is obtained, the winning probability differs depending on the set value. By doing so, the game in which the stop result at the time of winning a specific result changes depending on the game state can be influenced by the increase / decrease rate and the increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and through such a change in the stop result. , It is also possible to suggest a set value.

Feature F10. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, in the first game state, the stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies is executed so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the second game state. In the special result (strong cherry 3 and strong watermelon 4 in the fourth embodiment), the stop drive control of each orbiter is executed so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. It has been set and
In a situation where the first set value is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes either the specific result or the special result, and the second set value are set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature F9, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes either the specific result or the special result is set to be the same probability in the present situation.

According to the above configuration, the appearance rate of the first specific pattern combination in the first gaming state is the same regardless of the set value, and the appearance rate of the second specific pattern combination in the second gaming state depends on the set value. It will have different appearance rates. By doing so, it is possible to guess the set value through the appearance of the second specific pattern combination in the second gaming state.

Features F11. The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein a plurality of types of the specific results are provided as the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, even if the winning probability on the special result side does not differ depending on the set value, by adjusting the winning probability of a plurality of types of specific results, the total winning probability that becomes the specific result and the special result is set as the set value. It can be the same probability regardless. Therefore, in a game in which the appearance rate of the first specific pattern combination is common to the set value in the first game state, but the appearance rate of the second specific pattern combination is different depending on the set value in the second game state. The degree of freedom of processing based on special results can be improved.

In the above configuration, "the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result in the situation where the first set value is set by the setting means, and the second set value are set by the setting means. The above effect can be more clearly achieved by limiting the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result in the same situation. " ..

Feature F12. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the orbitals stops in the first stop order, the first result winning can be established, and each of the orbitals is different from the first stop order. The order correspondence result (push order replay, push order bell) that enables the second result winning different from the first result to be established when stopped in the stop order of 2 is included.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order correspondence result, the special notification means (push order notification) capable of executing the special notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order of each orbiting body by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) ( (Function to execute push order notification processing by the display control device 81) and
The special processing means (first specific combination processing to third specific combination processing by the main control device 101) capable of performing processing related to the special notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means is executed. Function) and
The gaming machine according to the feature F10 or the feature F11.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the result corresponds to the order, the result of winning the prize differs depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, so that the advantage for the player may change. Then, it is considered that the player wants to receive a special notification regarding the stop order. In that respect, since the processing related to the special notification is performed at the time of winning the special result in which the first specific pattern combination appears in the first game state, the game is performed while expecting the first specific pattern combination to appear. It is thought that it will be done. Since the first specific pattern combination appears not only at the special result but also at the time of winning the specific result, even if the configuration does not perform the processing related to the special notification at the time of winning the specific result, it is as if the special notification is also given. It is possible to make people think that the processing related to is being performed. In other words, when the first specific pattern combination appears, it cannot be determined from the stop result whether the special result or the specific result is the trigger, so even if the processing related to the special notification is not performed (the specific result). However, it is possible to leave the possibility that processing related to special notification is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the first specific pattern combination.

In addition, the above-mentioned configuration can exert the above-mentioned effect more clearly by adding the limitation that "the specific result does not trigger the execution of the processing related to the special notification by the special processing means".

Feature F13. The gaming machine according to feature F12, wherein in the second gaming state, execution of processing related to the special notification by the special processing means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, in the second gaming state in which the stop result changes, the execution of the processing related to the special notification by the special processing means is restricted, so that the first specific pattern combination appears as a special result. However, the processing related to the special notification is not performed. In that respect, if it is a specific result, a second specific pattern combination appears and it is possible to determine the set value, so that the player is useful even if the processing related to the special notification is not performed. It may be possible to obtain information. In this way, in the second game state, when the special result or the specific result is won, the player can see the case where the first specific pattern combination appears and the case where the second specific pattern combination appears. By differentiating the emotions given (degree of disappointment, etc.), it is possible to increase the interest in the stop roll. Further, in the second gaming state, for example, by making it possible not only to present useful information (processing related to special notification is restricted), for example, the transition from the second gaming state to another gaming state is made. If it is possible to make it possible, it is possible to realize a game such as shifting to the other game state while considering the balance between these advantageous / disadvantageous events.

Feature F14. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a non-trigger result (strong cherry 1, strong watermelon 1) that does not trigger the execution of the process related to the special notification by the special processing means is provided.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-trigger result in the first game state, the stop drive control of each of the orbiting bodies is executed so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-trigger result in the second game state, the stop drive control of each orbiting body is executed so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. Being done
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the non-triggered result in the situation where the first set value is set by the setting means, and the lottery in the situation where the second set value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature F12 or feature F13, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the means becomes the non-trigger result is set to be different.

According to the above configuration, a non-trigger result is provided, which is a result in which the winning probability differs depending on the set value and does not trigger the execution of the process related to the special notification, and the stop result of the non-trigger result changes depending on the game state. Instead, the first specific pattern combination appears in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Since such a result is provided in addition to the specific result or the special result, the setting value is suggested through the appearance rate of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination in the second gaming state. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to make an interest in which pattern combination appears in the second gaming state.

Further, when the above configuration is applied to a configuration in which the execution of the process related to the special notification is restricted in the second gaming state, the appearance of the first specific pattern combination in the second gaming state is a special result and is related to the special notification. It is also possible to make it difficult to understand whether the execution of the process is restricted or whether the process related to the special notification is not performed in the first place because it is a non-triggered result.

Feature F15. The specific control means has a predetermined pattern (red bell / white bell) predetermined in the effective position of the specific orbiter in the first gaming state and a specific pattern (white BAR, black BAR) different from the predetermined pattern. Of these, the stop drive control of the specific orbiting body is executed so that the predetermined pattern can be stopped preferentially, and the predetermined pattern and the specific pattern are placed in the effective position of the specific orbiting body in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14, characterized in that the stop drive control of the specific orbiter is executed so that the specific pattern can be stopped preferentially.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the stop result between the first game state and the second game state by changing the priority of the pattern to stop at the effective position for the specific orbiting body.

Features F16. The specific pattern and the predetermined pattern are arranged on the specific orbiting body so that the predetermined pattern can also be stopped when the operation of the stop operation means is performed at a timing at which the specific pattern can be stopped. The gaming machine according to the feature F15, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the predetermined pattern is set to have priority as the priority of the specific pattern and the predetermined pattern, the predetermined pattern can be stopped even if the operation is performed aiming at the specific pattern. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the event that the second specific pattern combination appears during the first gaming state.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first advantageous gaming state (bonus state) and the first advantageous gaming state are different from the first advantageous gaming state (bonus state) as a state that can be transferred based on the lottery result by the lottery means and is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. 2 Advantageous gaming states (attack mode, etc.) are provided.
A first transition determination means (a function of executing a process of setting a bonus winning flag by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not the first transition condition for transitioning to the first advantageous gaming state is satisfied.
When it is determined by the first transition determining means that the first transition condition is satisfied, the first transition means (bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous gaming state is executed. Function to do) and
A second transition determination means (a function of executing the first to third specific combination processes by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not the second transition condition for transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state is satisfied, and
When it is determined by the second transition determination means that the second transition condition is satisfied, the second transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state is performed. Function to execute) and
In the first specific situation (a situation that is not a carry-over state) in which the first transition condition is determined not to be satisfied by the first transition determination means, the lottery result by the lottery means triggers the establishment of the second transition condition. In the case of the specific result to be obtained, the first means (right by the main control device 101) for controlling the stop drive of each orbiting body so that the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result can be stopped at the effective position. Function to execute reel restriction processing) and
In the second specific situation (carry-over state) before the first transition determination means determines that the first transition condition is satisfied and the first transition means shifts to the first advantageous gaming state. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the second specific pattern combination that corresponds to the specific result at the effective position and is different from the first specific pattern combination can be stopped. A second means (a function of executing the right reel first restriction release process or the right reel second limit release process by the main control device 101) for controlling the stop drive of each orbiting body so as to be.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state are the gaming states that can be transferred based on the lottery result. Since it has a plurality of advantageous gaming states such as, it is possible to have an interest not only on the lottery result of each game but also on whether or not there is a transition to these plurality of advantageous gaming states. More specifically, in a situation where the trigger for transition to one advantageous gaming state and the trigger for transition to another advantageous gaming state overlap, or the conditions for transition to one advantageous gaming state are satisfied, further. There is a possibility that the lottery result may satisfy the transition condition to another advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to provide unprecedented fun in the game of each game by chaining or duplicating such advantageous gaming states. Will be. Moreover, in the above configuration, in the situation where the first transition condition to the first advantageous gaming state is satisfied and the transition to the first advantageous gaming state has not occurred, the preparation for the so-called first advantageous gaming state is in progress. In a certain second specific situation, if a specific result occurs as a lottery result that triggers a transition to the second advantageous gaming state, a stop result different from the stop result in the first specific situation in the other case is not obtained. Eyes (second specific pattern combination) appear. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the opportunity to shift to the second advantageous gaming state has occurred while preparing for the first advantageous gaming state, and regarding the overlap / chain of both advantageous gaming states, the first 1 It is possible to play a game while presuming that an event different from a specific situation will occur.

On the other hand, in such a configuration in which the overlapping of advantageous gaming states does not occur, if the transition to one advantageous gaming state is established and the transition to another advantageous gaming state occurs. There is a possibility of so-called loss. In that respect, according to the above configuration, the appearance of a stop roll different from the first specific situation makes it possible to clearly grasp the occurrence of the loss by the change of the stop roll. For example, if compensation for a loss is made through this change in the stop roll, the lottery result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous gaming state during the preparation for the first advantageous gaming state can be obtained. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the first transition condition is set so as to be satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state.

According to the above configuration, if the first transition condition is satisfied during the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, which causes overlap or chaining of both advantageous gaming states. be able to. If the configuration of feature C1 is applied to a gaming machine premised on such playability, it is expected that the stop result when a specific result is obtained during preparation for the first advantageous gaming state will change. It is possible to arouse the feeling.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the second transition condition is set so as not to be satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state.

According to the above configuration, since the second transition condition is not satisfied even if a specific result is obtained at least after the transition to the first advantageous gaming state, the second specific situation in preparation for the first advantageous gaming state is being prepared. The fact that the specific result is obtained in the above can be preferable for the player as compared with the fact that the specific result is obtained in the first advantageous gaming state. By notifying the player of such a situation through the event that the stop roll is changed, it is possible to raise the interest in the stop roll.

Features G4. The first transition determining means is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not the first transition condition is satisfied based on a result in which the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of G3.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result that triggers the transition to the first advantageous gaming state and the lottery result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous gaming state are different. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which one of the advantageous game states is enjoyed depending on the lottery result, and it is possible to increase the interest in the stop result of each orbiting body corresponding to the lottery result.

Feature G5. The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the first specific pattern combination or the second specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, it is possible to give a privilege corresponding to the specific result. ,
Corresponding to the result that the lottery result by the lottery means can be the trigger for the establishment of the first transition condition, and when the third specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the result can be the trigger for the establishment of the first transition condition. It is possible to give benefits to
At least one of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination and the third specific pattern combination are characterized in that each pattern combination is set so as to generate a common pattern combination portion. The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G4.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result game that triggers the transition to the first advantageous gaming state and the lottery result game that triggers the transition to the second advantageous gaming state are the same or similar lottery results. It will be a stop roll that gives an impression. Therefore, in the game in which these stop rolls are stopped, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it may be possible to shift to either or any of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. It will be possible. In particular, even in a configuration where the lottery results that trigger each transition are different, as in the feature G4, by making the stop rolls that give the impression that the lottery results are similar as described above, the two advantageous gaming states overlap. It is possible to provide a sense of expectation that a chain may occur. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature G6. The third specific pattern combination is set so that the pattern combination portion common to the first specific pattern combination is generated, while the common pattern combination portion is generated from the second specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to feature G5, which is characterized in that it is set so as not to be present.

According to the above configuration, in the first specific situation, by giving the impression that the establishment triggers of the first transition condition and the second transition condition are similar, it is possible to provide a sense of expectation for the chain and overlap of both advantageous gaming states. On the other hand, in the second specific situation, it is possible to provide an expectation for an event different from the chain or duplication of both advantageous gaming states by giving the impression that the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established differently. can.

Feature G7. As the lottery result by the lottery means, the payout result in which the game medium is paid out as the privilege by the privilege granting means is set.
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result in the normal gaming state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result in the first advantageous gaming state will be different. While set to get
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result in the normal gaming state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result in the second advantageous gaming state have the same probability. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, which is characterized in that it is set to be.

According to the above configuration, the first advantageous gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of the predetermined payout result changes from the normal gaming state. Therefore, the advantage for the player is improved by paying out the game medium as a payout result. On the other hand, in the second advantageous gaming state, the winning probability of the predetermined payout result does not change from the normal gaming state. Therefore, the advantage for the player is improved because the payout result is different from the payout of the game medium. In this case, as described in the feature G1, the second specific pattern combination appears when the specific result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is obtained during the preparation for the transition to the first advantageous gaming state. That is, during the preparation for the transition to the first advantageous gaming state before the probability of the predetermined payout result changes, the specific result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous gaming state in which the probability of the predetermined payout result does not change. In the case of, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the winning probability of the predetermined payout result changes after that, through the appearance of the second specific pattern combination. In other words, when a specific result is obtained in the first specific situation, by making the first specific pattern combination appear, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is advantageous even if the winning probability of the predetermined payout result does not change. In addition, if a specific result is obtained in the second specific situation, it is not known whether or not there is a transition to the second advantageous gaming state by making the second specific pattern combination appear. After that, it is possible to understand that the transition to the first advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous, occurs due to the change in the winning probability of the predetermined payout result. In this case, for example, when the number of payouts of the game media during the predetermined period reaches the upper limit, the game state is reset to the initial state, or a privilege is given according to the number of payouts of the game media during the predetermined period and the number of winnings of the payout result. It can be said that there is a great deal of interest in whether or not the probability of a payout result changes in a configuration in which is given. In that respect, as described above, it is possible to grasp whether or not the winning probability of the payout result changes by the stop roll, so that the degree of attention to the stop roll can be suitably increased.

Features G8. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, wherein the second transition condition is set so as not to be satisfied in the second specific situation.

According to the above configuration, the second transition condition is not satisfied even if the specific result is obtained in the second specific situation. Therefore, by notifying the player of such a situation through the event that the stop result is changed, it becomes possible to clearly understand that the overlapping / chaining of advantageous gaming states does not occur depending on the specific result of this time. ..

Feature G9. The feature is that when the second specific pattern combination is stopped, a specific event (setting value suggestion, point assignment) that is more advantageous to the player than when the first specific pattern combination is stopped can occur. Features The gaming machine described in G8.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific pattern combination is stopped as a specific result in the second specific situation, instead of the second transition condition not being satisfied, the first specific pattern combination is stopped as compared with the case where the first specific pattern combination is stopped. Certain events may occur that are beneficial to the player. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss that the overlapping / chaining of advantageous gaming states does not occur.

Feature G10. The second means makes it possible to stop the second specific pattern combination when the operation of the stop operation means is performed at the timing at which the second specific pattern combination can be stopped, while the second means. The gaming machine according to feature G9, characterized in that the second specific pattern combination cannot be stopped when the operation of the stop operation means is performed at a timing at which the specific pattern combination cannot be stopped.

According to the above configuration, when the specific result is won, the second specific pattern combination does not stop unless the eye-pressing operation is successful, and the second specific pattern combination does not stop if the eye-pressing operation fails. Therefore, no specific event occurs. By doing so, even if a situation that can be a so-called loss occurs in the second specific situation, it is fun that a game in which a push operation is performed and a specific event occurs due to the success of the game. Through this, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss that the overlapping / chaining of advantageous gaming states does not occur.

Feature G11. As the lottery result by the lottery means, the payout result (bell or the like) in which the game medium is paid out as the privilege by the privilege granting means is set.
The privilege granting means is based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result and the pattern combination (bell alignment) for payout corresponding to the payout result is stopped at the effective position. The number of game media corresponding to the above is paid out.
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the payout result is set higher than the probability that the specific result will be obtained.
The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the second specific pattern combination is a pattern combination for payout.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result is obtained in the second specific situation, the same stop roll (combination of symbols for payout) that is the same as the payout result that is won with a higher probability than the probability of the specific result appears. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to realize that the second transition condition is not satisfied even if a specific result is obtained in the second specific situation.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values of the plurality of stages is set. Function to set the winning probability by 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the lottery by the lottery means or the lottery result, the specific determination means (first by the main control device 101) that executes the specific determination as to whether or not a predetermined specific event (shift to the attack mode or the like, addition) is caused. Equipped with a function to execute specific combination processing to third specific combination processing)
The advantage when it is determined by the specific determination means that the specific event is caused in the situation where the first set value (setting 1) is set by the setting means, and the first set value by the setting means. Is set as the same degree of advantage when it is determined by the specific determination means that the specific event is caused in a situation where a different second set value is set.
Set value suggesting means (main control device 101) capable of suggesting the set value set by the setting means in a specific situation (carryover state) in which the execution of the specific determination by the specific determination means is restricted. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to execute stop information setting processing by.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a specific judgment is made as to whether or not a specific event is caused based on the lottery by the lottery means or the lottery result. May be Therefore, a game or process that causes a specific event different from the game, such as stopping the orbiting body so as to be a stop result corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means and obtaining a privilege, is performed by the same lottery means. It becomes possible to perform based on the above, and diversification of games may occur. On the other hand, if a specific event is generated indefinitely, a game that emphasizes a game based on such a specific event is more important than a game in which a stop operation is performed aiming at each pattern that should be the main game of a so-called slot machine. There is also a situation that it is not preferable because it can be sex. In that respect, regarding a specific event, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, the advantage is the same, so that the increase / decrease rate of the game medium is not affected, and the increase / decrease rate, etc. Is configured to be realized by the above-mentioned main games. Moreover, for a game based on a specific event, a specific situation is set in which the execution of a specific determination as to whether or not to cause the specific event is restricted, so that the master-slave relationship of the game is guaranteed from this point of view as well. There is. Further, in a specific situation where the restriction is applied to a specific event in which the advantage does not change regardless of the set value, the setting value for the above main game is suggested, so that the master-slave relationship between the two games is secured. However, both games can be related to each other, and it is possible to diversify and enhance the games.

In addition, "the advantage in the case where the specific determination means determines to cause the specific event in the situation where the first set value (setting 1) is set by the setting means, and the first setting means. In a situation where a second set value different from the set value is set, the advantage when it is determined by the specific determination means to cause the specific event is set as the same degree of advantage. " "The advantage based on the specific event is common regardless of the set value set by the setting means" and "Based on the specific event regardless of the set value set by the setting means". The advantage does not change. "

Feature H2. As the specific event, special notification (push order notification) corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a game different from the game that triggered the specific determination is executed by the predetermined notification means. Features The gaming machine according to H1.

According to the above configuration, the specific event relates to a special notification executed by a predetermined notification means. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the winning probability of each result by the lottery means, and the game related to the specific event can be realized without major change from the conventional configuration. Moreover, since the special notification corresponds to the lottery result by the lottery means in the game different from the game that triggered the specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event, the special notification corresponds to the game in which the specific determination is performed. It is possible to improve the degree of attention throughout the game while associating a plurality of games such as a game in which special notification is performed.

Feature H3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the orbitals stops in the first stop order, the first result can be won, and each of the orbitals has a second stop order different from the first stop order. A stop order correspondence result (push order combination) is set so that a second result different from the first result can be won when stopped at.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the stop order correspondence result, the special notification means (a function of executing the push order notification process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the notification regarding the stop order as the special notification is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature H2, which is characterized by being

According to the above configuration, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the stop order correspondence result which may be different depending on the stop order of the orbiting body is set, and the special notification regarding the stop order may be executed by the predetermined notification means. be. Therefore, the playability that different results can be won by performing the special notification is realized. Then, the player will play the game while expecting the special notification to be performed, and may tend to expect more than the main game such as stopping the orbiting body aiming at the pattern and obtaining a privilege. In that respect, as described in the feature H1, since the master-slave relationship is guaranteed so as not to overemphasize the game regarding such a stop order, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features H4. The specific determination means can execute the specific determination based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined trigger result (specific combination).
Any of the features H1 to H3, wherein the set value suggestion means can suggest the set value based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the trigger result in the specific situation. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suggest a set value instead of restricting the execution of the specific determination by the specific determination means even if the trigger result is obtained in the specific situation. By doing so, despite the fact that the winner was elected as a result of the opportunity, the feeling of loss that the execution of the specific judgment is restricted due to the specific situation and the specific event cannot occur can be felt. It can be supplemented by suggesting a set value.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the set value suggestion means suggests the set value by stopping a specific pattern combination predetermined at the effective position.

According to the above configuration, the set value is suggested through the stop roll in a specific situation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the stop result in a specific situation, and the setting value is suggested through the original playability of the slot machine such as performing the stop operation aiming at each pattern, so that the playability is important. It can enhance sex.

Feature H6. In the specific pattern combination, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the stop operation means is stopped at the first timing for a predetermined orbital body among the orbiting bodies. On the other hand, the stop operation means cannot be stopped because the stop operation means is stopped at a second timing different from the first timing.
In the drive control means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and when the stop operation means is stopped at the second timing, the pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination is stopped. The stop drive control of each orbiter is executed so as to be performed.
The privilege granting means grants a privilege corresponding to the specific result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, while the lottery means is used. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein even if the lottery result is the specific result, the privilege corresponding to the specific result is not given when the different pattern combination stops at the effective position.

According to the above configuration, the specific pattern combination is stopped when the eye-pressing operation is successful, and is not stopped when the eye-pressing operation is unsuccessful. Therefore, when trying to suggest a set value by stopping a specific pattern combination in a specific situation, it is possible to suggest the set value if the eye-pressing operation is successful, while the eye-pressing operation. If it fails, not only the setting value is not suggested, but also so-called omission occurs, and the privilege corresponding to the specific result cannot be obtained. In this way, it is possible to improve the playability by balancing the benefit of the setting value suggestion with the risk of missing, and to enhance the enjoyment when a specific result is obtained in a specific situation.

Feature H7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a special pattern combination (triple cherry) different from the specific pattern combination is used as a stop result in which the privilege corresponding to the specific result can be given by the privilege giving means. ) Is set,
The set value suggestion means does not suggest the set value even if the special pattern combination is stopped.
The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the special pattern combination can be stopped regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the stop operation means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration that enhances the enjoyment at the time of winning a specific result by the benefit of the setting value suggestion and the risk of missing, the setting value is not suggested but there is no risk of dropping (special pattern combination). By providing, it is possible to select a game in which the player is aware of the risk of being missed and suggesting the set value, and a game in which the risk of being missed is avoided and the setting value is not suggested. For example, a player who does not want to cause omission will select the latter game, and if the narrowing down of the set value has already been completed, there is no need to suggest a new set value, so in this case. Is also considered to select the latter game. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game that meets various needs.

Feature H8. Equipped with a predetermined staging means (auxiliary display unit 65)
The feature of the set value suggestion means is that the set value suggestion is suggested by the predetermined staging means on condition that at least one of the symbols constituting the specific pattern combination is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of H5 to H7.

According to the above configuration, if the setting value suggestion is performed by a predetermined staging means, the mode of the setting value suggestion (for example, display content and the like) can be various. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the performance is performed only by a predetermined production means, the game of aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body and stopping the game may be neglected. Therefore, the setting value suggestion is performed on the condition that one of the patterns in the specific pattern combination is stopped, that is, on the condition that the operation is performed aiming at the specific pattern combination for at least one orbiter. Then, while ensuring the importance of the game of aiming and stopping the pattern of the orbiting body, it is possible to suggest the set value by associating the stop result with the effect content by the predetermined effect means.

Feature H9. The set value suggesting means is
A means for suggesting a set value including the set value of the first number as the set value by stopping the first specific pattern combination as the specific pattern combination at the effective position.
The setting value of the second number different from the first number as the setting value through the stop of the second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination as the specific pattern combination at the effective position. The means by which the setting value suggestion includes
Equipped with
When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at the timing at which the first specific pattern combination can be stopped, the second specific pattern combination cannot be stopped, and the second specific pattern combination can be stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features H5 to H8, wherein the first specific pattern combination cannot be stopped when the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at the timing of the stop operation.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which setting value suggestion with different narrowing degree can be performed through a stop roll, let's make setting value suggestion of one narrowing degree (setting value suggestion including the first number setting value). When the stop operation is performed aiming at the first specific pattern combination, the second specific pattern combination corresponding to the setting value suggestion of the other narrowing degree (setting value suggestion including the second number setting value) is stopped. Can't. By doing so, it is possible to add a game in which the player selects which set value suggestion is to be performed.

Feature H10. The first number is set to be larger than the second number.
The gaming machine according to feature H9, wherein the appearance rate of the first specific pattern combination is set to be higher than the appearance rate of the second specific pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the setting value suggestion that makes it easy to narrow down the setting value is less likely to appear than the setting value suggestion that makes it difficult to narrow down the setting value. You can choose whether to do it.

Features H11. The specific determination means can execute the specific determination based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined trigger result (specific combination).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the trigger result, the privilege granting means grants the privilege corresponding to the trigger result by stopping the pattern combination for the trigger predetermined at the effective position. can be,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H5 to H10, wherein the specific pattern combination and the pattern combination for the trigger are set so that a common pattern combination portion is generated. ..

According to the above configuration, the setting value suggestion can be performed by a stop roll similar to the stop roll that is the trigger result winning that triggers the execution of the specific determination. By doing so, instead of restricting the execution of the specific judgment, the impression that the setting value suggestion is being made can be strengthened, so that the trigger result is won in the specific situation where the specific judgment is restricted. Even so, it is possible to dilute the impression that it has become a so-called loss.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the lottery result by the lottery means, the payout result in which the game medium is paid out as the privilege by the privilege granting means is set.
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the predetermined payout result is different from the normal gaming state in the first specific state (CB state based on the first CB to the fourth CB) and the second specific state (first BB, second BB). Based on bonus status) is set,
The game state is determined based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result, and the pattern combination for the first transition corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. The first transition means for transitioning to the second specific state (a function of executing the process of shifting to the CB state in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) and
The game state is determined based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result, and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result is stopped at the effective position. A second transition means for transitioning to the second specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to the bonus state in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second shift result, the reservation means (by the main control device 101) that reserves the second shift result until the pattern combination for the second shift stops at the effective position. (Function to execute the process of step S609) and
Equipped with
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result (specific combination in the seventh embodiment) of the first transition result and the predetermined specific result (bell) is set.
In the case where the duplicated result is won in the specific situation in which the second transition result is reserved by the reservation means, it is allowed to win the specific result among the first transition result and the specific result. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific means (a function of executing a lottery process in a carry-over state in the main control device 101) for limiting the winning of the first transition result.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific state and a second specific state in which the probability of winning a predetermined payout result is different are set. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning that triggers the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state. The first transition result may be won in duplicate with the specific result, and the second transition result may be reserved even if the winning game does not win. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that the first transition result winning and the second transition result winning may overlap, and such an event is not preferable from the viewpoint of avoiding an extremely high ball output rate. However, in the specific situation where the second transition result winning is reserved, if the duplicate result winning itself is restricted, the probability that the specific result will be obtained in the specific situation will be reduced accordingly, and it will be a push operation. If it is difficult for an unfamiliar player or the like to generate a second transition result prize, a loss of the game medium may occur in a specific situation.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the probability of other payout results is increased to compensate for the duplicated results for such a specific situation, it becomes necessary to newly prepare a lottery table, and the amount of stored data is increased. It may lead to an increase. Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation in which such a second transition result is reserved, the specific result is won after allowing the overlapping result of the first transition result and the specific result to be won. However, the first transition result is not won. As a result, even if a new lottery table or the like is not prepared, the specific result is won in the specific situation where the second transition result is reserved while avoiding the duplicate winning of the first transition result and the second transition result. Can be generated.

Feature I2. The privilege granting means is based on the fact that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a specific pattern combination (upper bell) different from the pattern combination for the first transition is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to the feature I1, wherein the privilege corresponding to the specific result is given.

According to the above configuration, the correspondence between each result and the stop result (winning mode) is determined by using the configuration in which the first transition result is restricted when the duplicate result is won in a specific situation. While keeping it, it is possible to make the stop result different for each state. That is, in the configuration of the feature E1, if the duplicated result is won in a situation different from the specific situation, it is possible to win a prize for both the specific result and the first transition result, but the duplicate result is made in the specific situation. When the result is won, it is possible to cause an event such that only a specific result can be won by using the same duplicate result. Then, by making the stop result in which the first transition result prize is established and the stop result in which the specific result prize is established different as described above, even if the same duplicate result is won, other than the specific situation. Then, one of the stop rolls will appear, and in a specific situation, the stop roll corresponding to the specific result winning will appear. By doing so, it is possible to realize a playability in which the stop result is different for each state with a simple configuration.

Feature I3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result winning, the drive control means makes it possible to stop the specific pattern combination at the timing at which the pattern combination for the first transition can be stopped. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein when the stop operation means is operated at a timing, the combination of symbols for the first transition is controlled to stop at the effective position.

According to the above configuration, when the duplicated result is won in a situation other than the specific situation, the first transition result prize among the first transition result and the specific result is preferentially established. By doing so, it is possible to realize the playability such that the first transition result winning is established in a non-specific situation and the specific result winning is established in a specific situation by one overlapping result.

Feature I4. Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicated result, the specific determination means (first by the main control device 101) for executing the specific determination as to whether or not a specific event advantageous to the player is caused. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that it is provided with a specific combination processing to a function of executing a third specific combination processing).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to winning a duplicate result by inciting a feeling of expectation for a specific event.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I4, which comprises means for limiting the execution of the specific determination by the specific determination means (a function of executing the process of step S702 by the main control device 101) in the specific situation. ..

According to the above configuration, since the execution of the specific determination is restricted in the specific situation, even if the lottery result is a duplicate result, the specific determination is not executed and the specific event does not occur. Then, depending on whether or not it is a specific situation, there will be a difference such as whether or not the specific determination is executed when the duplicate result is won. In that respect, by expressing such a difference by the difference in the winning result shown in the feature I1, the specific judgment is made through the fact that the first transition result winning is not established in the specific situation (the specific result winning is established). It is possible to make people understand that was not done.

Feature I6. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (push order bell) including the specific result while not including the first transition result is set.
The specific determination means according to the feature I5, wherein the specific determination means does not execute the specific determination or makes a determination that does not cause the specific event when the lottery result by the lottery means wins the special result. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, it is judged that the specific judgment is not performed or the specific event does not occur. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the presence or absence of such a specific event, the overlap between the time when the special result is won and the specific situation. As a result, it will be the same as when winning. Moreover, if a duplicate result is won in a specific situation, a specific result prize can be established, and similarly, if a special result is won, a specific result prize can be established. Then, from the appearance of the player, it becomes difficult to understand whether the specific result winning is established based on the duplicate result winning or the specific result winning based on the special result winning in a specific situation, and a specific event occurs. It becomes difficult to understand whether it is because the execution of the specific judgment is restricted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of loss that the specific determination is restricted even though the duplicate result is won in the specific situation.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result is higher than the probability that the duplicate result is won.

According to the above configuration, the special result is won with a higher probability than the duplicate result. Therefore, when duplicate results are won in a specific situation, the event that the specific result winning is established may give a stronger impression that it is based on the special result winning rather than the impression that it is based on the specific result winning. can. This makes it possible to more effectively exert the effect of the feature I6.

Feature I8. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the orbitals stops in the first stop order, the first result winning can be established, and each of the orbitals is different from the first stop order. The order correspondence result (push order replay, push order bell) that enables the second result winning different from the first result to be established when stopped in the stop order of 2 is included.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order correspondence result, the special notification means (push order notification) capable of executing the special notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order of each orbiting body by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) ( It is equipped with a function to execute push order notification processing by the display control device 81).
The gaming machine according to any one of features I4 to I7, wherein the specific determination means makes a specific determination regarding the presence / absence of execution or the number of executions of the special notification as the specific event.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the result corresponds to the order, the result of winning the prize differs depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, so that the result on the advantageous side can be won, which is advantageous for the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for winning the duplicate result that triggers the specific determination.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature I group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature I group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol row, and the symbol fluctuation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device is provided with a throwing device for generating a game, etc., and further providing a ball tray to take in a game ball from the ball tray, and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32 ... Reel as an orbiter, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary production unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting an auxiliary effect unit, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board, 102 ... CPU constituting various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means. ..

Claims (1)

Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the design of each orbital body, and
A starting operation means in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means for starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated.
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The game state is played based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result, and the pattern combination for the first transition corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. The first specific state is shifted to a person's advantage, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result, and the pattern for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result at the effective position. A transition means for shifting the gaming state to a second specific state, which is advantageous for the player and different from the first specific state, based on the fact that the combination is stopped.
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, the symbol combination for the first transition is stopped at the effective position or the symbol combination for the second transition is stopped. Until then, the reservation means for retaining the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, an advantageous lottery for executing an advantageous lottery regarding an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player and different from the first specific state and the second specific state is executed. Means and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the state where the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is performed. The limiting means to limit and
When the reservation means reserves the first transition result winning and the limiting means restricts the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means, the first specific control is executed based on the specific result winning. Means and
When the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the execution of the advantageous lottery by the advantageous lottery means is restricted by the limiting means, the second specific control is different from the first specific control based on the specific result winning. 2 Second means to execute specific control and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images